WO2012035838A1 - Cellulose ester film, production method therefor, polarizing plate provided therewith, and liquid crystal display - Google Patents

Cellulose ester film, production method therefor, polarizing plate provided therewith, and liquid crystal display Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012035838A1
WO2012035838A1 PCT/JP2011/064004 JP2011064004W WO2012035838A1 WO 2012035838 A1 WO2012035838 A1 WO 2012035838A1 JP 2011064004 W JP2011064004 W JP 2011064004W WO 2012035838 A1 WO2012035838 A1 WO 2012035838A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
cellulose ester
film
carbon atoms
ester film
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/064004
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
美典 玉川
Original Assignee
コニカミノルタオプト株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by コニカミノルタオプト株式会社 filed Critical コニカミノルタオプト株式会社
Priority to JP2012533892A priority Critical patent/JPWO2012035838A1/en
Publication of WO2012035838A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012035838A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C41/00Shaping by coating a mould, core or other substrate, i.e. by depositing material and stripping-off the shaped article; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C41/24Shaping by coating a mould, core or other substrate, i.e. by depositing material and stripping-off the shaped article; Apparatus therefor for making articles of indefinite length
    • B29C41/32Making multilayered or multicoloured articles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C41/00Shaping by coating a mould, core or other substrate, i.e. by depositing material and stripping-off the shaped article; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C41/24Shaping by coating a mould, core or other substrate, i.e. by depositing material and stripping-off the shaped article; Apparatus therefor for making articles of indefinite length
    • B29C41/28Shaping by coating a mould, core or other substrate, i.e. by depositing material and stripping-off the shaped article; Apparatus therefor for making articles of indefinite length by depositing flowable material on an endless belt
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B23/00Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose
    • B32B23/20Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose comprising esters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08JWORKING-UP; GENERAL PROCESSES OF COMPOUNDING; AFTER-TREATMENT NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G or C08H
    • C08J5/00Manufacture of articles or shaped materials containing macromolecular substances
    • C08J5/18Manufacture of films or sheets
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L1/00Compositions of cellulose, modified cellulose or cellulose derivatives
    • C08L1/08Cellulose derivatives
    • C08L1/10Esters of organic acids, i.e. acylates
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L1/00Compositions of cellulose, modified cellulose or cellulose derivatives
    • C08L1/08Cellulose derivatives
    • C08L1/10Esters of organic acids, i.e. acylates
    • C08L1/12Cellulose acetate
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements
    • G02B5/3025Polarisers, i.e. arrangements capable of producing a definite output polarisation state from an unpolarised input state
    • G02B5/3033Polarisers, i.e. arrangements capable of producing a definite output polarisation state from an unpolarised input state in the form of a thin sheet or foil, e.g. Polaroid
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29KINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES B29B, B29C OR B29D, RELATING TO MOULDING MATERIALS OR TO MATERIALS FOR MOULDS, REINFORCEMENTS, FILLERS OR PREFORMED PARTS, e.g. INSERTS
    • B29K2001/00Use of cellulose, modified cellulose or cellulose derivatives, e.g. viscose, as moulding material
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29KINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES B29B, B29C OR B29D, RELATING TO MOULDING MATERIALS OR TO MATERIALS FOR MOULDS, REINFORCEMENTS, FILLERS OR PREFORMED PARTS, e.g. INSERTS
    • B29K2995/00Properties of moulding materials, reinforcements, fillers, preformed parts or moulds
    • B29K2995/0018Properties of moulding materials, reinforcements, fillers, preformed parts or moulds having particular optical properties, e.g. fluorescent or phosphorescent
    • B29K2995/0034Polarising
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/20Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08JWORKING-UP; GENERAL PROCESSES OF COMPOUNDING; AFTER-TREATMENT NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G or C08H
    • C08J2301/00Characterised by the use of cellulose, modified cellulose or cellulose derivatives
    • C08J2301/08Cellulose derivatives
    • C08J2301/10Esters of organic acids
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08JWORKING-UP; GENERAL PROCESSES OF COMPOUNDING; AFTER-TREATMENT NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G or C08H
    • C08J2301/00Characterised by the use of cellulose, modified cellulose or cellulose derivatives
    • C08J2301/08Cellulose derivatives
    • C08J2301/10Esters of organic acids
    • C08J2301/12Cellulose acetate

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a cellulose ester film, a method for producing the same, a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film, and a liquid crystal display device. More specifically, the present invention relates to a cellulose ester film having a high transmittance, a production method thereof, a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film, and a liquid crystal display device having a high contrast.
  • a liquid crystal display device is composed of a liquid crystal cell in which a transparent electrode, a liquid crystal layer, a color filter, etc. are sandwiched between glass plates, and two polarizing plates provided on both sides thereof. The child is sandwiched between two optical films. A cellulose ester film is usually used for this optical film.
  • This optical film for liquid crystal display devices is increasing in production year by year due to the increase in size and spread of liquid crystal display devices.
  • the film width is increased, the film length is increased, and the film forming process associated therewith is increased. Speeding up is being studied.
  • liquid crystal display devices have been increased in size and functionality, and there has been a demand for improved contrast.
  • Patent Document 1 describes a method of degassing cellulose ester dope under reduced pressure and improving the transparency of the film by using a filter aid, but filtration with a small particle size in the dope after filtration. It was found that the film remained cloudy because the auxiliary agent remained, and it did not directly lead to improvement in contrast.
  • Patent Document 2 describes a method of installing a filter so that the filter aid is not mixed into the dope after filtration.
  • cellulose triacetate (TAC) having a high degree of substitution is sufficient.
  • DAC diacetylcellulose
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • the filter aid is clogged with the filter, resulting in a decrease in filtration efficiency and no improvement in productivity.
  • term characterized by being the cellulose ester film by which the core layer containing the cellulose ester which satisfy
  • term characterized by having the skin A layer containing the cellulose ester which satisfy
  • the length of the film is in the range of 5000 to 10,000 m, and the width of the film is in the range of 1.9 to 2.5 m.
  • a method for producing a cellulose ester film according to any one of items 1 to 5, wherein the average particle size is in the range of 5 to 20 ⁇ m, and the standard deviation of particle size A method for producing a cellulose ester film, comprising a step of filtering using a filter aid having a mean particle size of 0.5 times or less and a filter having a filtration accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • a polarizing plate comprising the cellulose ester film according to any one of items 1 to 5 above.
  • a liquid crystal display device comprising the cellulose ester film according to any one of items 1 to 5.
  • the above-described means of the present invention can provide a cellulose ester film having a high transmittance and a method for producing the same.
  • a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film and a liquid crystal display device with high contrast can be provided.
  • Co-casting die and a diagram showing a multi-layered web formed by casting
  • the cellulose ester film of the present invention contains a cellulose ester having an acyl group having a carbon number in the range of 2 to 4 and an acyl group substitution degree in the range of 2.0 to 2.5.
  • the number of foreign matters having a circle-equivalent diameter in the range of 60 to 100 ⁇ m is 10 or less per 10 cm square
  • the number of foreign matters having a circle-equivalent diameter in the range of 10 to 50 ⁇ m is 10 or less per 10 cm square.
  • the internal haze is 0.1 or less and the thickness is in the range of 20 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • a skin B layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the above formula (2) is laminated as a core layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the above formula (1) from the viewpoint of the effect of the present invention.
  • the film is preferably a formed cellulose ester film.
  • the length of the film is preferably in the range of 5000 to 10000 m, and the width of the film is preferably in the range of 1.9 to 2.5 m.
  • filtration is performed using a filter aid having an average particle size in the range of 5 to 20 ⁇ m, a particle size standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle size, and a filter having a filtration accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 ⁇ m. It is preferable that it is manufactured through the process of performing.
  • a filter aid having an average particle diameter in the range of 5 to 20 ⁇ m and a particle diameter standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle diameter is used. It is preferable that the production method has an aspect including a step of filtering using an agent and a filter having a filtration accuracy within the range of 1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • a “core layer” means the layer which exists in the inside among the laminated
  • the layer thickness is preferably thicker than the skin layer on the outside.
  • the thickest layer is referred to as a “core layer”.
  • the “skin layer” refers to a layer on the outer surface side of the laminated layers when the cellulose ester film is composed of three or more layers.
  • the layer thickness is preferably thinner than the core layer on the inner side.
  • the term “skin layer” refers to both “skin A layer” and “skin B layer”.
  • the “skin A layer” may be referred to as an “air surface layer”
  • the “skin B layer” may be referred to as a “support surface layer”.
  • the “core layer” may be referred to as a “base layer”.
  • the film sample is observed with an optical microscope at a magnification of 150 times, and the number of bright spot foreign matters within the range of a circle converted diameter of 60 to 100 ⁇ m and a circle converted diameter of 10 to 50 ⁇ m within 100 mm 2 is counted.
  • “bright spot foreign matter” means a spot formed by light transmitted through the polarizing plate when two polarizing plates are arranged on both sides of the cellulose ester film so as to block the transmitted light. In general, the polarizing action does not function sufficiently due to the presence of foreign matter in the film. The number of the bright spot foreign matters can be measured with an optical microscope.
  • the “circle converted diameter” means a diameter obtained by converting the projected area of the bright spot foreign matter observed with an optical microscope as the area of the circle.
  • filter aid having a particle size standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle size means a filter aid having a standard deviation of particle size of the average particle size ⁇ 0.5 or less. The smaller the standard deviation, the smaller the variation in the particle size of the filter aid, so that it is difficult for the film to become cloudy or to reduce the filtration efficiency.
  • is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the cellulose ester film of the present invention contains a cellulose ester having an acyl group having a carbon number in the range of 2 to 4 and an acyl group substitution degree in the range of 2.0 to 2.5.
  • the film has 10 or less foreign matter with a circle converted diameter of 60 to 100 ⁇ per 10 cm square, and 10 or less foreign materials with a circle converted diameter of 10 to 50 ⁇ per 10 cm square.
  • the haze is 0.1 or less and the thickness is in the range of 20 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • a core layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (1) and a skin B layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (2) are laminated from the viewpoint of manifesting the effects of the present invention. It is preferable that it is a film-formed cellulose ester film.
  • Formula (1) 2.0 ⁇ Z 1 ⁇ 2.5
  • Z 1 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the core layer.
  • Formula (2) 2.7 ⁇ Z 2 ⁇ 3.0
  • Z 2 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.
  • a skin A layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the formula (2) may be further provided on a surface opposite to the surface on which the skin B layer of the core layer formed by lamination is provided. From the viewpoint of suitably controlling the physical properties (curl) of the film.
  • a retardation adjusting agent to at least one of the core layer or the skin layer and stretch it, and the co-casting causes technically inevitable partial variations in the thickness of the core layer and the skin layer. Even if it is a case, the influence which the optical characteristic of the whole laminated film receives is suppressed, and the variation of Ro and Rt can be suppressed.
  • the cellulose ester laminated film of the present invention has high expression of optical properties and very little variation in optical properties.
  • the cellulose ester film of the present invention contains a cellulose ester having an acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms and an acyl group substitution degree of 2.0 to 2.5.
  • examples of the acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms include an acetyl group, a propionyl group, and a butanoyl group.
  • the ⁇ -1,4-bonded glucose unit constituting cellulose has free hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions.
  • the cellulose ester is a polymer obtained by acylating part or all of these hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) with an acyl group.
  • the total acyl group substitution degree is the ratio in which all of the hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) of cellulose located at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions are acylated per glucose unit (100% acylation has a degree of substitution of 3). Means.
  • An embodiment of the present invention is a cellulose ester film in which a core layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (1) and a skin B layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (2) are laminated and formed. It is preferable that
  • Formula (1) 2.0 ⁇ Z 1 ⁇ 2.5
  • Z 1 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the core layer.
  • Formula (2) 2.7 ⁇ Z 2 ⁇ 3.0
  • Z 2 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.
  • a skin A layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the formula (2) may be further provided on a surface opposite to the surface on which the skin B layer of the core layer formed by lamination is provided. From the viewpoint of suitably controlling the physical properties (curl) of the film.
  • the Z 1 preferably satisfies 2.1 ⁇ Z 1 ⁇ 2.45.
  • the Z 2 preferably satisfies 2.75 ⁇ Z 2 ⁇ 2.95, and particularly preferably satisfies 2.80 ⁇ Z2 ⁇ 2.95.
  • the cellulose ester contained in the skin layer and the core layer can have the following acyl group, and may be an aliphatic group or an aryl group, and is not particularly limited.
  • acyl group cellulose alkylcarbonyl ester, alkenylcarbonyl ester, aromatic carbonyl ester, aromatic alkylcarbonyl ester and the like, each of which may further have a substituted group.
  • acyl groups include acetyl, propionyl, butanoyl, heptanoyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl, decanoyl, dodecanoyl, tridecanoyl, tetradecanoyl, hexadecanoyl, octadecanoyl, Examples thereof include an isobutanoyl group, a tert-butanoyl group, a cyclohexanecarbonyl group, an oleoyl group, a benzoyl group, a naphthylcarbonyl group, and a cinnamoyl group.
  • an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butanoyl group, a dodecanoyl group, an octadecanoyl group, a tert-butanoyl group, an oleoyl group, a benzoyl group, a naphthylcarbonyl group, a cinnamoyl group, and the like are more preferable, and an acetyl group is particularly preferable.
  • a propionyl group and a butanoyl group (when the acyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms) are more preferable, and an acetyl group (when the cellulose ester is cellulose acetate) is more preferable.
  • an organic acid such as acetic acid or methylene chloride is used as an organic solvent as a reaction solvent.
  • the catalyst when the acylating agent is an acid anhydride, a protic catalyst such as sulfuric acid is preferably used, and when the acylating agent is an acid chloride (for example, CH 3 CH 2 COCl), Basic compounds are used.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cellulose ester used in the present invention is preferably in the range of 30000 to 300000, since the mechanical strength of the resulting film is strong. Further, those having 50000-200000 are preferably used.
  • the ratio Mw / Mn of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cellulose ester is preferably 1.4 to 3.0.
  • the most common industrial synthesis method of mixed fatty acid esters of cellulose is cellulose mixed organics containing fatty acids corresponding to acetyl groups and other acyl groups (acetic acid, propionic acid, valeric acid, etc.) or acid anhydrides thereof. This is a method of acylating with an acid component.
  • the cellulose ester used in the present invention can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in JP-A-10-45804.
  • L20, L30, L40, and L50 from Daicel Chemical Industries, and Ca398-3, Ca398-6, Ca398-10, Ca398-30, and Ca394-60S from Eastman Chemical.
  • a retardation adjusting agent (a retardation developing agent and a retardation reducing agent), a plasticizer such as a phthalate ester and a phosphate ester, an ultraviolet absorber, an antioxidant, a matting agent, etc. Additives can also be added.
  • the retardation adjusting agent is not particularly limited, and when additives such as a plasticizer, an ultraviolet absorber, an antioxidant, and a matting agent are also used as the retardation adjusting agent, these additives are used in the present invention. Included in modifier.
  • Retardation expression agent in this invention, in order to express a retardation value, what consists of a rod-shaped or a disk shaped compound can be mentioned.
  • a compound having at least two aromatic rings can be preferably used as a retardation developer.
  • the addition amount of the retardation developer composed of a rod-shaped compound is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass, and preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component containing cellulose acylate. Is more preferable.
  • the disk-like retardation developer is preferably used in the range of 0.05 to 20 parts by mass, and in the range of 1.0 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component containing cellulose acylate. It is more preferable to use in the range of 3.0 to 10 parts by mass.
  • a discotic compound is superior to a rod-shaped compound in terms of retardation development, it is preferably used when particularly large retardation is required.
  • Two or more types of retardation developing agents may be used in combination.
  • the retardation developer preferably has a maximum absorption in the wavelength region of 250 to 400 nm, and preferably has substantially no absorption in the visible region.
  • the discotic compound will be described.
  • As the discotic compound a compound having at least two aromatic rings can be used.
  • aromatic ring includes an aromatic heterocycle in addition to an aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is particularly preferably a 6-membered ring (that is, a benzene ring).
  • the aromatic heterocycle is generally an unsaturated heterocycle.
  • the aromatic heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring.
  • Aromatic heterocycles generally have the most double bonds.
  • a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable, and a nitrogen atom is particularly preferable.
  • aromatic heterocycles include furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, furazane ring, triazole ring, pyran ring, pyridine ring , Pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring and 1,3,5-triazine ring.
  • aromatic ring a benzene ring, a condensed benzene ring and biphenyls are preferable.
  • 1,3,5-triazine ring is preferably used.
  • compounds disclosed in JP-A No. 2001-166144 are preferably used.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic ring of the retardation developer is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 12, still more preferably 2 to 8, and more preferably 2 to 6. Most preferred.
  • the bonding relationship between two aromatic rings can be classified into (a) when forming a condensed ring, (b) when directly connecting with a single bond, and (c) when connecting via a linking group (for aromatic rings). , Spiro bonds cannot be formed).
  • the bond relationship may be any of (a) to (c).
  • condensed ring examples include an indene ring, a naphthalene ring, an azulene ring, a fluorene ring, a phenanthrene ring, an anthracene ring, an acenaphthylene ring, a biphenylene ring, a naphthacene ring, Pyrene ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring, indolizine ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzotriazole ring, purine ring, indazole ring, chromene ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline Ring, quinolidine ring, quinazoline ring, cinnoline ring, quinoxaline ring, phthalazine
  • the single bond is preferably a bond between carbon atoms of two aromatic rings.
  • Two aromatic rings may be bonded by two or more single bonds to form an aliphatic ring or a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring between the two aromatic rings.
  • the linking group is also preferably bonded to carbon atoms of two aromatic rings.
  • the linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, —CO—, —O—, —NH—, —S—, or a combination thereof. Examples of linking groups composed of combinations are shown below. In addition, the relationship between the left and right in the following examples of the linking group may be reversed.
  • substituents include halogen atoms (F, Cl, Br, I), hydroxy groups, carboxy groups, cyano groups, amino groups, nitro groups, sulfo groups, carbamoyl groups, sulfamoyl groups, ureido groups, alkyl groups, alkenyls.
  • alkynyl group alkynyl group, aliphatic acyl group, aliphatic acyloxy group, alkoxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, alkylthio group, alkylsulfonyl group, aliphatic amide group, aliphatic sulfonamido group, aliphatic substituted amino group
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-8.
  • a chain alkyl group is preferable to a cyclic alkyl group, and a linear alkyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group may further have a substituent (for example, a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl-substituted amino group).
  • Examples of alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups) include methyl, ethyl, n-butyl, n-hexyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 4-carboxybutyl, 2-methoxyethyl and 2-methoxyethyl.
  • Each group of a diethylaminoethyl group is included.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • a chain alkenyl group is preferable to a cyclic alkenyl group, and a linear alkenyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the alkenyl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the alkenyl group include a vinyl group, an allyl group, and a 1-hexenyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkynyl group is preferably 2-8.
  • a chain alkynyl group is preferable to a cyclic alkynyl group, and a linear alkynyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the alkynyl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the alkynyl group include ethynyl group, 1-butynyl group and 1-hexynyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic acyl group is preferably 1-10.
  • Examples of the aliphatic acyl group include an acetyl group, a propanoyl group, and a butanoyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic acyloxy group is preferably 1-10.
  • Examples of the aliphatic acyloxy group include an acetoxy group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkoxy group is preferably 1-8.
  • the alkoxy group may further have a substituent (for example, an alkoxy group).
  • a substituent for example, an alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group (including a substituted alkoxy group) include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group, and a methoxyethoxy group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably 2 to 10.
  • Examples of the alkoxycarbonyl group include a methoxycarbonyl group and an ethoxycarbonyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkoxycarbonylamino group is preferably 2 to 10.
  • Examples of the alkoxycarbonylamino group include a methoxycarbonylamino group and an ethoxycarbonylamino group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkylthio group is preferably 1-12.
  • Examples of the alkylthio group include a methylthio group, an ethylthio group, and an octylthio group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkylsulfonyl group is preferably 1-8.
  • Examples of the alkylsulfonyl group include a methanesulfonyl group and an ethanesulfonyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic amide group is preferably 1-10.
  • Examples of the aliphatic amide group include acetamide.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic sulfonamide group is preferably 1-8.
  • Examples of the aliphatic sulfonamido group include a methanesulfonamido group, a butanesulfonamido group, and an n-octanesulfonamido group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted amino group is preferably 1-10.
  • Examples of the aliphatic substituted amino group include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, and a 2-carboxyethylamino group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic substituted carbamoyl group is preferably 2 to 10.
  • Examples of the aliphatic substituted carbamoyl group include a methylcarbamoyl group and a diethylcarbamoyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted sulfamoyl group is preferably 1-8.
  • Examples of the aliphatic substituted sulfamoyl group include a methylsulfamoyl group and a diethylsulfamoyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted ureido group is preferably 2 to 10.
  • Examples of the aliphatic substituted ureido group include a methylureido group.
  • non-aromatic heterocyclic groups examples include piperidino groups and morpholino groups.
  • the molecular weight of the retardation developer is preferably 300 to 800.
  • each R 1 independently represents an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring having a substituent in at least one of the ortho position, the meta position, and the para position.
  • Each X independently represents a single bond or NR 2 —.
  • each R 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the aromatic ring represented by R 1 is preferably phenyl or naphthyl, and particularly preferably phenyl.
  • the aromatic ring represented by R 1 may have at least one substituent at any substitution position.
  • substituents include a halogen atom, hydroxy group, cyano group, nitro group, carboxy group, alkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, alkenyloxy group, aryloxy group, acyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, Alkenyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, sulfamoyl group, alkyl-substituted sulfamoyl group, alkenyl-substituted sulfamoyl group, aryl-substituted sulfamoyl group, sulfonamide group, carbamoyl, alkyl-substituted carbamoyl group, alkenyl-
  • the heterocyclic group represented by R 1 preferably has aromaticity.
  • the heterocycle having aromaticity is generally an unsaturated heterocycle, preferably a heterocycle having the largest number of double bonds.
  • the heterocyclic ring is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring, and most preferably a 6-membered ring.
  • the hetero atom of the heterocyclic ring is preferably a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom, and particularly preferably a nitrogen atom.
  • heterocyclic ring having aromaticity a pyridine ring (2-pyridyl or 4-pyridyl as the heterocyclic group) is particularly preferable.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent of the heterocyclic group are the same as the examples of the substituent of the aryl moiety.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a heterocyclic group having a free valence on the nitrogen atom.
  • the heterocyclic group having a free valence on the nitrogen atom is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring, and a 5-membered ring. Is most preferred.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a plurality of nitrogen atoms. Further, the heterocyclic group may have a hetero atom other than the nitrogen atom (for example, O, S). Examples of heterocyclic groups having free valences on nitrogen atoms are shown below. Here, —C 4 H 9 n represents nC 4 H 9 .
  • the alkyl group represented by R 2 may be a cyclic alkyl group or a chain alkyl group, but a chain alkyl group is preferable, and a linear alkyl group is more preferable than a branched chain alkyl group. preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, still more preferably 1 to 8, and further preferably 1 to 6. Most preferred.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group) and an acyloxy group (for example, acryloyloxy group, methacryloyloxy group).
  • the alkenyl group represented by R 2 may be a cyclic alkenyl group or a chain alkenyl group, but preferably represents a chain alkenyl group, and is a straight chain alkenyl group rather than a branched chain alkenyl group. More preferably it represents a group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkenyl group is preferably 2 to 30, more preferably 2 to 20, further preferably 2 to 10, still more preferably 2 to 8, and further preferably 2 to 6 is most preferred.
  • the alkenyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent are the same as those of the alkyl group described above.
  • the aromatic ring group and heterocyclic group represented by R 2 are the same as the aromatic ring and heterocyclic ring represented by R 1 , and the preferred range is also the same.
  • the aromatic ring group and the heterocyclic group may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent are the same as those of the aromatic ring and heterocyclic ring of R 1 .
  • a triphenylene compound represented by the following general formula (II) can also be preferably used.
  • R 1 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by each of R 1 to R 6 is an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • alkenyl group preferably carbon An alkenyl group having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a 2-butenyl group, and a 3-pentenyl group.
  • An alkynyl group (preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, For example, a propargyl group, a 3-pentynyl group, etc.), an aryl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, , Phenyl group, p-methylphenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted amino group (preferably having 0 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 0 to carbon atoms).
  • an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 carbon atom).
  • an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a butoxy group).
  • a reeloxy group (preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyloxy group and a 2-naphthyloxy group.
  • An acyl group (preferably an acyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, for example, an acetyl group, a benzoyl group, a formyl group, a pivaloyl group)
  • An alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, etc.) Groups), aryloxycarbonyl groups (preferably having 7 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon numbers)
  • an acyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms such as an acetoxy group and a benzoyloxy group
  • an acylamino group preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • Particularly preferred are acylamino groups having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as acetylamino group and benzoylamino group
  • alkoxycarbonylamino groups preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms for example, methoxy A sulfonylamino group
  • an aryloxycarbonylamino group preferably an aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms, , A phenyloxycarbonylamino group, etc.
  • An unsubstituted carbamoyl group a methylcarbamoyl group, a diethylcarbamoyl group, a phenylcarbamoyl group, and the like), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to carbon atoms).
  • arylthio group preferably having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as Fe A sulfonyl group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as mesyl group and tosyl group).
  • a sulfinyl group (preferably a sulfinyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a methanesulfinyl group and a benzenesulfinyl group).
  • Ureido groups preferably ureido groups having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as unsubstituted ureido groups, methylureido groups, Phenylureido group, etc.
  • phosphoric acid amide group preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • a phosphoric acid amide group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a diethylphosphoric acid amide group and a phenylphosphoric acid amide group, a hydroxy group, a mercapto group, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom), cyano group, sulfo group, carboxy group, nitro group, hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, hydrazino
  • each of R 1 to R 6 is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted amino group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, or a halogen atom.
  • R 1 to R 6 is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted amino group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, or a halogen atom.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (I) is, for example, a method described in JP-A-2003-344655, and the compound represented by the general formula (II) is, for example, a method described in JP-A-2005-134484. Can be synthesized by a known method.
  • rod-like compounds having a linear molecular structure can be preferably used in addition to the above-mentioned discotic compounds.
  • the linear molecular structure means that the molecular structure of the rod-like compound is linear in the most thermodynamically stable structure.
  • the most thermodynamically stable structure can be obtained by crystal structure analysis or molecular orbital calculation.
  • molecular orbital calculation is performed using molecular orbital calculation software (for example, WinMOPAC2000, manufactured by Fujitsu Limited), and a molecular structure that minimizes the heat of formation of a compound can be obtained.
  • the molecular structure being linear means that in the thermodynamically most stable structure obtained by calculation as described above, the angle of the main chain constituting the molecular structure is 140 degrees or more.
  • the rod-shaped compound having at least two aromatic rings is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (11).
  • Ar 1 -L 1 -Ar 2 In the general formula (11), Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently an aromatic group.
  • the aromatic group includes an aryl group (aromatic hydrocarbon group), a substituted aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, and a substituted aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • An aryl group and a substituted aryl group are more preferable than an aromatic heterocyclic group and a substituted aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group is generally unsaturated.
  • the aromatic heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring.
  • Aromatic heterocycles generally have the most double bonds.
  • a hetero atom a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is preferable, and a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable.
  • a benzene ring As the aromatic ring of the aromatic group, a benzene ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, an imidazole ring, a triazole ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring and a pyrazine ring are preferable, and a benzene ring is particularly preferable. .
  • Examples of the substituent of the substituted aryl group and the substituted aromatic heterocyclic group include a halogen atom (F, Cl, Br, I), a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a cyano group, an amino group, an alkylamino group (for example, methyl Amino group, ethylamino group, butylamino group, dimethylamino group), nitro group, sulfo group, carbamoyl group, alkylcarbamoyl group (for example, N-methylcarbamoyl group, N-ethylcarbamoyl group, N, N-) Dimethylcarbamoyl group), sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group (eg, N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl group), ureido Group, alkylure
  • preferable substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, carboxy groups, hydroxy groups, amino groups, alkylamino groups, acyl groups, acyloxy groups, amide groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, alkoxy groups, alkylthio groups, and alkyl groups. Can be mentioned.
  • the alkyl moiety of the alkylamino group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkoxy group, and alkylthio group and the alkyl group may further have a substituent.
  • substituents of the alkyl group include a halogen atom, hydroxy group, carboxy group, cyano group, amino group, alkylamino group, nitro group, sulfo group, carbamoyl group, alkylcarbamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfur group.
  • a halogen atom As the substituent for the alkyl moiety and the alkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, and an alkoxy group are preferable.
  • L1 is a divalent linking group selected from an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, —O—, —CO— and a combination thereof.
  • the alkylene group may have a cyclic structure.
  • cyclic alkylene group cyclohexylene is preferable, and 1,4-cyclohexylene is particularly preferable.
  • chain alkylene group a linear alkylene group is more preferable than a branched alkylene group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-15, still more preferably 1-10, still more preferably 1-8, and most preferably 1-6. It is.
  • the alkenylene group and the alkynylene group preferably have a chain structure rather than a cyclic structure, and more preferably have a linear structure rather than a branched chain structure.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkenylene group and the alkynylene group is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 8, further preferably 2 to 6, further preferably 2 to 4, and most preferably 2. (Vinylene group or ethynylene group).
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 16, and still more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the angle formed by Ar 1 and Ar 2 across L 1 is preferably 140 degrees or more.
  • a compound represented by the following formula (12) is more preferable.
  • Ar 1 -L 2 -XL 3 -Ar 2 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently an aromatic group.
  • the definition and examples of the aromatic group are the same as those of Ar 1 and Ar 2 in the general formula (12).
  • L 2 and L 3 are each independently a divalent linking group selected from an alkylene group, —O—, —CO— and a group consisting of a combination thereof.
  • the alkylene group preferably has a chain structure rather than a cyclic structure, and more preferably has a linear structure rather than a branched chain structure.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 8, still more preferably 1 to 6, further preferably 1 to 4, and 1 or 2 (methylene group). Or an ethylene group) is most preferable.
  • L 2 and L 3 are particularly preferably —O—CO— or CO—O—.
  • X represents a 1,4-cyclohexylene group, a vinylene group or an ethynylene group.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (11) or (12) include compounds described in [Chemical Formula 1] to [Chemical Formula 11] of JP-A No. 2004-109657.
  • Two or more rod-like compounds having a maximum absorption wavelength ( ⁇ max) longer than 250 nm in the ultraviolet absorption spectrum of the solution may be used in combination.
  • the rod-like compound can be synthesized with reference to the methods described in the literature.
  • rod-like aromatic compounds described on pages 11 to 14 of JP-A-2004-50516 may be used as the Ro enhancer.
  • the retardation developer one kind of compound can be used alone, or two or more kinds of compounds can be mixed and used. It is preferable to use two or more different compounds as the retardation enhancer because the retardation adjustment range is widened and can be easily adjusted to a desired range.
  • the amount of addition of the retardation developer is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of cellulose acylate.
  • the retardation developer may be added to the dope.
  • the addition may be performed at any timing, for example, the retardation developer may be dissolved in an organic solvent such as alcohol, methylene chloride, dioxolane, and then added to the cellulose acylate solution (dope), or You may add directly in dope composition.
  • the ratio of the discotic compound is preferably 0.1 to 20%, more preferably 0.5 to 15%, more preferably 1 to 10 based on the total mass of the discotic compound and the rod-shaped compound. % Is particularly preferred.
  • Specific examples (1) to (34), (41), and (42) have two asymmetric carbon atoms at the 1-position and the 4-position of the cyclohexane ring. However, since the specific examples (1), (4) to (34), (41), (42) have a symmetrical meso type molecular structure, there are no optical isomers (optical activity), and geometric isomers (trans Type and cis type). The trans type (1-trans) and cis type (1-cis) of specific example (1) are shown below.
  • the rod-like compound preferably has a linear molecular structure. Therefore, the trans type is preferable to the cis type.
  • optical isomers a total of four isomers
  • the trans type is similarly preferable to the cis type.
  • the optical isomer is not particularly superior or inferior, and may be D, L, or a racemate.
  • the central vinylene bond includes a trans type and a cis type.
  • the trans type is preferable to the cis type.
  • a polymer additive can be used as in the case of the low molecular weight compound.
  • the polymer additive is selected from polyester polymers, styrene polymers, acrylic polymers, and copolymers thereof, and aromatic polyesters are preferred.
  • the aromatic polyester polymer used in the present invention is obtained by copolymerizing a monomer having an aromatic ring with the polyester polymer.
  • the monomer having an aromatic ring is at least one monomer selected from aromatic dicarboxylic acids having 8 to 20 carbon atoms and aromatic diols having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • aromatic dicarboxylic acid having 8 to 20 carbon atoms examples include phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,8-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,8- There are naphthalenedicarboxylic acid and 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid.
  • preferable aromatic dicarboxylic acids are phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and isophthalic acid.
  • aromatic diol having 6 to 20 carbon atoms examples include, but are not limited to, bisphenol A, 1,2-hydroxybenzene, 1,3-hydroxybenzene, 1,4-hydroxybenzene, and 1,4-benzenedimethanol. Of these, bisphenol A, 1,4-hydroxybenzene, and 1,4-benzenedimethanol are preferred.
  • the aforementioned polyester is used in combination with at least one of aromatic dicarboxylic acid or aromatic diol, but the combination is not particularly limited, and there is no problem even if several kinds of each component are combined. .
  • a high molecular weight additive whose end is sealed with an alkyl group or an aromatic group is particularly preferable, and the above-described method can be used for sealing.
  • polyester polymer used in the present invention is described below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • Examples of the retardation developing agent according to the present invention include, for example, a discotic compound and a rod-like compound among the retardation developing agents, among which triazine compounds and rod-like compounds having a plurality of aromatic rings (1 ) To (7) are preferred.
  • a plasticizer In the present invention, a plasticizer, a deterioration inhibitor, an ultraviolet absorber, a peeling accelerator, a matting agent, a lubricant, the above-described plasticizer, and the like can be appropriately used as necessary.
  • phosphoric acid ester or carboxylic acid ester is used.
  • phosphate esters include triphenyl phosphate (TPP) and tricresyl phosphate (TCP).
  • carboxylic acid ester include phthalic acid esters and citric acid esters.
  • phthalic acid esters include dimethyl phthalate (DMP), diethyl phthalate (DEP), dibutyl phthalate (DBP), dioctyl phthalate (DOP), diphenyl phthalate (DPP) and diethyl hexyl phthalate (DEHP).
  • citrate esters examples include triethyl O-acetylcitrate (OACTE) and tributyl O-acetylcitrate (OACTB).
  • carboxylic acid esters examples include butyl oleate, methylacetyl ricinoleate, dibutyl sebacate, and various trimellitic acid esters.
  • Phthalate plasticizers DMP, DEP, DBP, DOP, DPP, DEHP
  • DEP and DPP are particularly preferred.
  • the addition amount of the plasticizer is preferably from 0.1 to 25% by mass, more preferably from 1 to 20% by mass, and most preferably from 3 to 15% by mass based on the mass of the cellulosic resin.
  • a known deterioration (oxidation) inhibitor such as 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 4,4′-thiobis- (6-tert-butyl-3-) is added to the cellulose ester solution.
  • Methylphenol 1,1'-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) cyclohexane, 2,2'-methylenebis (4-ethyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone, pentaerythrityl
  • a phenolic or hydroquinone antioxidant such as tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] can be added.
  • the deterioration inhibitor is added in an amount of 0.05 to 5.0 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose resin.
  • an ultraviolet absorber is preferably used for the cellulose ester solution from the viewpoint of preventing deterioration of a polarizing plate or liquid crystal.
  • the ultraviolet absorber those excellent in the ability to absorb ultraviolet rays having a wavelength of 370 nm or less and having little absorption of visible light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more are preferably used from the viewpoint of good liquid crystal display properties.
  • Specific examples of ultraviolet absorbers preferably used in the present invention include, for example, hindered phenol compounds, hydroxybenzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, salicylic acid ester compounds, benzophenone compounds, cyanoacrylate compounds, nickel complex compounds Etc.
  • hindered phenol compounds examples include 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate].
  • benzotriazole compounds include 2- (2′-hydroxy-5′-methylphenyl) benzotriazole, 2,2-methylenebis (4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) -6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) phenol), (2,4-bis- (n-octylthio) -6- (4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylanilino) -1,3,5- Triazine, triethylene glycol-bis [3- (3-tert-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate], N, N′-hexamethylenebis (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- Hydroxy-hydrocinnamide), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tris (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) benzene 2- (2'-hydroxy-3 ', 5'-di-tert-butylphenyl) -5-chlorobenzo
  • the film of the present invention contains a release accelerator from the viewpoint of more releasability.
  • the release accelerator can be included, for example, in a proportion of 0.001 to 1% by mass, and the addition of 0.5% by mass or less is preferable because separation of the release agent from the film hardly occurs. 005% by mass or more is preferable because a desired peeling reduction effect can be obtained. Therefore, it is preferably included at a rate of 0.005 to 0.5% by mass, and at a rate of 0.01 to 0.3% by mass. More preferably.
  • the peeling accelerator known ones can be adopted, and organic and inorganic acidic compounds, surfactants, chelating agents and the like can be used. Among them, polyvalent carboxylic acids and esters thereof are effective, and in particular, ethyl esters of citric acid can be used effectively.
  • the film of the present invention preferably contains a peeling accelerator in the skin B layer.
  • the film of the present invention is generally added with fine particles in order to prevent the film from being scratched or deteriorated in transportability.
  • They are called matting agents, anti-blocking agents or anti-scratching agents and have been used conventionally. They are not particularly limited as long as they have the above-described functions, and may be an inorganic compound matting agent or an organic compound matting agent.
  • the inorganic compound matting agent include silicon-containing inorganic compounds (for example, silicon dioxide, calcined calcium silicate, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate, etc.), titanium oxide, and zinc oxide.
  • silicon-containing inorganic compounds for example, silicon dioxide, calcined calcium silicate, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate, etc.
  • titanium oxide titanium oxide
  • zinc oxide Aluminum oxide, barium oxide, zirconium oxide, strongtium oxide, antimony oxide, tin oxide, tin oxide / antimony, calcium carbonate, talc, clay, calcined kaolin, calcium phosphate, etc., more preferably silicon-containing inorganic compounds and oxides
  • silicon dioxide is particularly preferably used.
  • silicon dioxide fine particles for example, commercially available products having trade names such as Aerosil R972, R974, R812, 200, 300, R202, OX50, TT600 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) can be used.
  • zirconium oxide fine particles for example, those commercially available under trade names such as Aerosil R976 and R811 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) can be used.
  • the organic compound matting agent include, for example, polymers such as silicone resin, fluorine resin, and acrylic resin, and among them, silicone resin is preferably used.
  • silicone resins those having a three-dimensional network structure are particularly preferable.
  • Tospearl 103, Tospearl 105, Tospearl 108, Tospearl 120, Tospearl 145, Tospearl 3120 and Tospearl 240 A commercial product having a trade name can be used.
  • the method is not particularly limited, and there is no problem as long as a desired cellulose ester solution can be obtained by any method.
  • an additive may be included at the stage of mixing the cellulose ester and the solvent, or the additive may be added after preparing a mixed solution with the cellulose ester and the solvent. Further, it may be added and mixed immediately before casting the dope, which is a so-called immediately preceding addition method, and the mixing is used by installing screw-type kneading online.
  • a static mixer such as an inline mixer is preferable.
  • the film of the present invention contains a matting agent in at least one of the skin A layer and the skin B layer, and is generated when a wide film is wound long by reducing the friction coefficient of the film surface. It is preferable from the viewpoint of prevention of creaking and prevention of film breakage, and it is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of effectively reducing scratch resistance and blemishes that both the skin A layer and the skin B layer contain a matting agent.
  • the matting agent when the matting agent is not added in a large amount, the haze of the film does not increase, and when actually used in an LCD, inconveniences such as a decrease in contrast and generation of bright spots are unlikely to occur. If the amount is too small, the above-mentioned creaking and scratch resistance can be realized. From these viewpoints, it is preferably included in a proportion of 0.01 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably included in a proportion of 0.03 to 3.0% by mass, and a proportion of 0.05 to 1.0% by mass. It is particularly preferable to include
  • the cellulose ester film of the present invention preferably has a haze of less than 1%, more preferably less than 0.5%. By setting the haze to less than 1%, there is an advantage that the transparency of the film becomes higher and it becomes easier to use as a cellulose ester film.
  • the film thickness of the single film is preferably 20 to 50 ⁇ m
  • the average film thickness of the core layer at the time of lamination is preferably 20 to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably 20 to 45 ⁇ m, and more preferably 30 to More preferably, it is 45 ⁇ m.
  • the handling property when producing a web-like film is improved, which is preferable.
  • it by setting it as 50 micrometers or less, it is easy to respond to a humidity change and it is easy to maintain an optical characteristic.
  • the film of the present invention may have an average film thickness of at least one of the skin A layer or the skin B layer of 0.2% or more and less than 25% of the average film thickness of the core layer. If it is less than 25%, the optical performance of the core layer can be effectively utilized, and the laminate film can be effectively used. Is preferable from the viewpoint of obtaining sufficient optical characteristics, more preferably 0.5 to 15%, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 10%. Moreover, it is more preferable that the average film thickness of the skin A layer and the skin B layer are both 0.2% or more and less than 25% of the average core layer film thickness.
  • the length of the film is preferably in the range of 5000 to 10,000 m, and the width of the film is preferably in the range of 1.9 to 2.5 m.
  • the film production method of the present invention comprises a step of dissolving a polymer in an organic solvent to prepare a dope (dope preparation step), a step of filtering the dope (filtration step), and casting the dope on a support.
  • a process (casting process), a process of drying the obtained film (drying process), a process of stretching the obtained film (stretching process), and other processes as necessary.
  • the manufacturing method of the cellulose-ester laminated film of this invention is a dope containing the cellulose ester which satisfy
  • the method includes a step of performing multilayer casting simultaneously or sequentially, a step of drying the multilayer cast dope and peeling it from the support, and a step of stretching the peeled film.
  • the film of the present invention is produced using a solution (dope) obtained by dissolving a cellulose ester in an organic solvent by a solvent cast method.
  • the organic solvent is selected from ethers having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, ketones having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, esters having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, and halogenated hydrocarbons having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. It is preferable to include a solvent.
  • the ether, ketone and ester may have a cyclic structure.
  • a compound having two or more functional groups of ether, ketone and ester (that is, —O—, —CO— and COO—) can also be used as the organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent may have another functional group such as an alcoholic hydroxy group (hydroxyl group). In the case of an organic solvent having two or more types of functional groups, the number of carbon atoms may be within the specified range of the compound having any functional group.
  • ethers having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include diisopropyl ether, dimethoxymethane, dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, 1,3-dioxolane, tetrahydrofuran, anisole and phenetole.
  • ketones having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, diethyl ketone, diisobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone and methylcyclohexanone.
  • esters having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include ethyl formate, propyl formate, pentyl formate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate and pentyl acetate.
  • organic solvent having two or more kinds of functional groups examples include 2-ethoxyethyl acetate, 2-methoxyethanol and 2-butoxyethanol.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the halogenated hydrocarbon is preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1.
  • the halogen of the halogenated hydrocarbon is preferably chlorine.
  • the proportion of halogen atoms in the halogenated hydrocarbon substituted with halogen is preferably 25 to 75 mol%, more preferably 30 to 70 mol%, and more preferably 35 to 65 mol%. More preferably, it is most preferably 40 to 60 mol%.
  • Methylene chloride is a representative halogenated hydrocarbon.
  • Two or more organic solvents may be mixed and used.
  • a cellulose ester solution can be prepared by a general method.
  • a general method means processing at a temperature of 0 ° C. or higher (ordinary temperature or high temperature).
  • the solution can be prepared by using a dope preparation method and apparatus in a normal solvent cast method.
  • the amount of cellulose ester is adjusted so as to be contained in the obtained solution in an amount of 10 to 40% by mass.
  • the amount of cellulose ester is more preferably 10 to 30% by mass.
  • Arbitrary additives may be added to the organic solvent (main solvent).
  • the solution can be prepared by stirring the cellulose ester and the organic solvent at room temperature (0 to 40 ° C.).
  • the high concentration solution may be stirred under pressure and heating conditions. Specifically, the cellulose ester and the organic solvent are placed in a pressure vessel and sealed, and stirred while heating to a temperature not lower than the boiling point of the solvent at normal temperature and in a range where the solvent does not boil.
  • the heating temperature is usually 40 ° C. or higher, preferably 60 to 200 ° C., more preferably 80 to 110 ° C.
  • Each component may be roughly mixed in advance and then placed in a container. Moreover, you may put into a container sequentially.
  • the container needs to be configured so that it can be stirred.
  • the container can be pressurized by injecting an inert gas such as nitrogen gas. Moreover, you may utilize the raise of the vapor pressure of the solvent by heating. Or after sealing a container, you may add each component under pressure.
  • a jacket type heating device can be used.
  • the entire container can also be heated by providing a plate heater outside the container and piping to circulate the liquid.
  • the stirring blade preferably has a length that reaches the vicinity of the wall of the container.
  • a scraping blade is preferably provided at the end of the stirring blade in order to renew the liquid film on the vessel wall.
  • instruments such as a pressure gauge and a thermometer may be installed. Each component is dissolved in a solvent in a container.
  • the prepared dope is taken out of the container after cooling, or taken out and then cooled using a heat exchanger or the like.
  • the solution can also be prepared by a cooling dissolution method.
  • the cellulose ester can be dissolved in an organic solvent that is difficult to dissolve by a normal dissolution method.
  • dissolution method there exists an effect that a uniform solution can be obtained rapidly according to a cooling melt
  • filtration process Various known filtration devices can be used for filtering the cellulose ester solution. That is, when roughly classified as a filter, it can be divided into a continuous filter and a batch pressure filter, and as a continuous filter, it can be divided into a belt type, a multiple disk type, a screw press type, a filter press type, etc. Examples of the batch pressure filter include a leaf type and a candle type.
  • a filter press device a paper filter device, a leaf filter device, a drum filter device, a precoat filter device, or the like can be used.
  • the industrially most advantageous product is a filter press apparatus, and the filter press apparatus may be pre-coated and used.
  • the filter press apparatus 40 to 50 plates of about 60 cm square are used, and a net is attached to each plate, and a filter paper or cotton cloth is installed between the nets.
  • a plurality of these filter press apparatuses may be used for filtration in multiple stages.
  • the leaf filter device can be suitably used.
  • a sintered metal filter As the filter material, a sintered metal filter, a non-woven metal filter, a cotton cloth filter, a paper filter, or the like may be used.
  • the filter medium to be used can be a natural fiber or a synthetic fiber.
  • polypropylene, polyester (tetron), and nylon can be used as the material of the synthetic fiber used for the filter cloth.
  • Vinylon, acrylic, saran, etc. can also be used depending on the solvent.
  • Each of these materials has characteristics on the material and can be used according to the characteristics.
  • cotton can be mentioned as a typical material.
  • Monofilaments, multifilaments, spun yarns and the like can be used as the type of raw yarn used for the filter cloth. When a monofilament is used, the cake peelability is excellent and clogging is small, but there is a disadvantage that the fine particles are poorly captured.
  • the filter cloth weave includes plain weave, twill weave, and satin weave.
  • plain weave particles are easily collected but clogging is accelerated.
  • twill weave a filter cloth having a good balance between collection and clogging can be obtained.
  • satin weaving particles are less clogged, but the ability to collect particles is poor.
  • plain or twill filter cloth is suitable.
  • cotton flannel (No. 10 B, plain weave diameter No. 20 single yarn 63, weft No. 10 single yarn 46), gold width (No. 11, plain weave diameter No. 40 single yarn 100, weft No. 40 single yarn 98 pieces ), Thick twill (26, twill, 12-3, 64, 12-4, 32) may be used.
  • filter paper 300 g / m 2 or the like may be used. These filter media may be used in combination (for example, the first filter media is one cotton flannel filter paper, the second filter media is two cotton flanks, one gold width, and the third filter media is one cotton flannel one filter paper and one gold width).
  • the retention average particle size (filtration accuracy) of the filter medium is preferably 1 to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably 1 to 20 ⁇ m, and most preferably 1 to 5 ⁇ m. Further, the standard deviation of the particle diameter is preferably 0.5 times or less of the average particle diameter, and more preferably 0.3 times or less of the average particle diameter.
  • the bulk density of the filter aid is more preferably in the range of 0.1 to 0.5 g / cm 3 , and still more preferably in the range of 0.3 to 0.4 g / cm 3 .
  • the bulk density is smaller than this range, the gap of the cake becomes large and the filtration accuracy is lowered. Conversely, if the bulk density is large, the filtration resistance increases and the apparatus becomes large.
  • the addition amount of the filter aid was regulated to 0.01 to 10% by mass with respect to the cellulose acylate solution.
  • the amount of filter aid added is preferably in the above range.
  • the addition amount of the filter aid is more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 5% by mass, and further preferably in the range of 0.1 to 0.5% by mass.
  • the pressure in the filtration step can be appropriately set in consideration of the filtration efficiency.
  • the filter medium may be pressurized to 5 to 18 atmospheres (for example, 8 to 18 atmospheres, for example, 10 to 18 atmospheres).
  • the shape of the cellulose mixed fatty acid ester composition obtained by dissolving cellulose ester in an organic solvent, filtering and drying may be a filament.
  • kaolin, titanium oxide, clay or the like may be used as a filter aid.
  • the filtrate may be kept at a temperature of about 40 to 50 ° C.
  • the filter medium may be pressurized to 5 to 18 atmospheres (eg, 8 to 18 atmospheres, eg, 10 to 18 atmospheres). Filtering is not performed once but multiple times (for example, the first filter medium is one cotton flannel, the second filter medium is two cotton flannels, one gold width, the third filter medium is one cotton flannel, one filter paper, one gold width, one filter medium structure)
  • the first filtration may be performed at 12 to 18 atm
  • the second filtration at 8 to 14 atm and the third filtration at 5 to 9 atm).
  • the filtration pressure may be changed between the first time and the second time (for example, the second filtration is performed at a lower pressure).
  • the temperature at the time of filtration can be any temperature as long as filtration is possible, but it is preferably 30-100 ° C, more preferably 35-80 ° C, and even more preferably 40-70 ° C. This is preferable because the viscosity of the solution can be lowered.
  • the filtration pressure is preferably in the range of 0.001 MPa to 10 MPa, more preferably in the range of 0.001 MPa to 5 MPa, and more preferably in the range of 0.01 MPa to 1 MPa.
  • the type of filter aid is not particularly limited, but cellulose, diatomaceous earth, pearlite, activated carbon, and powdered charcoal are preferably used, and among them, diatomaceous earth is preferred.
  • Celite for example, Filter-Cel, Celite 505, Standard Super-Cel, Celite 512, Hyflo Super-Cel1, Celite 501 manufactured by Johns-Manville Sales Corp.
  • Celite 535, Celite 545, Celite 560, etc. Dicalite (Superref, UF, Speedflow, Special Speed, Speed, etc., manufactured by Grefco, Inco, USA)
  • Radio lights RRADIOLITE # 100, RA manufactured by Showa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • a filter aid and a filtration agent having an average particle diameter in the range of 5 to 20 ⁇ m and a particle diameter standard deviation of 0.5 times or less in average particle diameter. It is preferable to perform filtration using a filter having an accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the solution casting method used in the method for producing a film of the present invention is a glass plate or metal plate having a high smoothness after the dope is prepared in a glass or metal container and filtered after being carried out in a small amount.
  • the film is cast to a desired film thickness on a support such as a small die or a doctor blade. After casting, primary drying is performed, and the film is peeled off from the support, framed as necessary, and post-dried.
  • a solution casting film forming method and a solution casting film forming apparatus conventionally used for producing a cellulose triacetate film can be used.
  • the dope prepared in the dissolving machine (kettle) is filtered, and the dope is finally prepared. After that, the dope is sent from the dope discharge port to the pressure die through a pressure metering gear pump capable of delivering a constant amount of liquid with high accuracy, for example, by the rotational speed, and the dope is run endlessly from the die (slit) of the pressure die.
  • the dope film (also referred to as a web) is peeled off from the support at a peeling point that is uniformly cast on the support (drum or band) and the support has almost gone around. Both ends of the obtained web are sandwiched between clips, transported by a tenter while keeping the width, dried, then transported by a roll group of a drying device, dried, and wound up to a predetermined length by a winder.
  • the combination of the tenter and the roll group dryer varies depending on the purpose.
  • the surface of the drum or band is preferably finished in a mirror state.
  • the casting and drying methods in the solvent casting method are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,336,310, 2,367,603, 2,492,078, 2,492,977. No.
  • the dope is preferably cast on a drum or band adjusted to an arbitrary surface temperature.
  • a cellulose acylate film in the case of a laminated film, can be produced from two or more kinds of prepared cellulose ester solutions (dope) by a solvent cast method.
  • the dope is cast on a drum or band, and the solvent is evaporated to form a film.
  • the dope before casting is preferably adjusted in concentration so that the solid content is 18 to 35% by mass.
  • the surface of the drum or band is preferably finished in a mirror state.
  • the dope is preferably cast on a drum or band having a surface temperature of 10 ° C. or lower. After casting, it is preferable to dry it by applying air for 2 seconds or more. The obtained film can be peeled off from the drum or band and further dried with high-temperature air whose temperature is successively changed from 100 ° C. to 160 ° C. to evaporate the residual solvent.
  • the above method is described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5-17844. According to this method, it is possible to shorten the time from casting to stripping. In order to carry out this method, it is necessary for the dope to gel at the surface temperature of the drum or band during casting.
  • the obtained cellulose ester solution is formed by casting the two or more cellulose ester solutions on a smooth band or drum as a support.
  • a well-known co-casting method can be used.
  • a film may be produced by laminating and laminating a solution containing a cellulose ester from a plurality of casting openings provided at intervals in the traveling direction of the metal support. The methods described in JP-A Nos. 158414, 1-122419, and 11-198285 can be applied.
  • a film may be formed by casting a cellulose ester solution from two casting ports.
  • JP-B-60-27562, JP-A-61-94724, JP-A-61-947245 It can be carried out by the methods described in JP-A Nos. 61-104813, 61-158413, and 6-134933.
  • the cellulose ester film casting method described in JP-A-56-162617 is a method of wrapping a flow of a high-viscosity cellulose ester solution with a low-viscosity cellulose ester solution and simultaneously extruding the high- and low-viscosity cellulose ester solution. Good.
  • the outer solution described in JP-A-61-94724 and JP-A-61-94725 contains a larger amount of an alcohol component which is a poor solvent than the inner solution.
  • the film cast on the metal support is peeled off by the first casting port, and the second casting is performed on the side that is in contact with the metal support surface.
  • a film may be produced, for example, a method described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 44-20235.
  • the cellulose ester solution to be cast may be the same solution or different cellulose ester solutions and is not particularly limited. In order to give a function to a plurality of cellulose ester layers, a cellulose ester solution corresponding to the function may be extruded from each casting port.
  • the cellulose ester solution according to the present invention can be cast simultaneously with other functional layers (for example, an adhesive layer, a dye layer, an antistatic layer, an antihalation layer, a UV absorbing layer, a polarizing layer).
  • other functional layers for example, an adhesive layer, a dye layer, an antistatic layer, an antihalation layer, a UV absorbing layer, a polarizing layer.
  • the film formation is simultaneous or sequential multilayer casting film formation.
  • the inner and outer thicknesses are not particularly limited, but preferably the outer side is preferably 0.2 to 50% of the total film thickness, more preferably 2 to 30%. .
  • the total thickness of the layer in contact with the metal support and the layer in contact with the air side is defined as the outer thickness.
  • a cellulose ester film having a laminated structure can be produced by co-casting cellulose ester solutions having different additive concentrations such as the above-mentioned plasticizer, ultraviolet absorber and matting agent.
  • a cellulose ester film having a structure of skin layer / core layer / skin layer can be produced.
  • the matting agent can be contained in the skin layer in a large amount or only in the skin layer.
  • the plasticizer and the ultraviolet absorber can be contained in the core layer more than the skin layer, and may be contained only in the core layer.
  • the type of plasticizer and ultraviolet absorber can be changed between the core layer and the skin layer.
  • the skin layer contains a low-volatile plasticizer and / or an ultraviolet absorber, and the core layer has excellent plasticity. It is also possible to add a plasticizer or an ultraviolet absorber excellent in ultraviolet absorption. Moreover, it is also a preferable aspect that a release agent is contained only in the skin layer on the metal support side. It is also preferable to add more alcohol, which is a poor solvent, to the skin layer than the core layer in order to cool the metal support by the cooling drum method to gel the solution.
  • the Tg of the skin layer and the core layer may be different, and the Tg of the core layer is preferably lower than the Tg of the skin layer.
  • the viscosity of the solution containing the cellulose ester during casting may be different between the skin layer and the core layer, and the viscosity of the skin layer is preferably smaller than the viscosity of the core layer. It may be smaller than the viscosity.
  • Drying process A method for drying a web that has been dried on a drum or belt and peeled off will be described.
  • the web peeled at the peeling position just before the drum or belt makes one round is conveyed by alternately passing through a group of rolls arranged in a staggered manner, or the both ends of the peeled web are gripped by clips or the like and are not contacted. It is conveyed by the method of conveying it automatically. Drying is performed by a method of applying wind at a predetermined temperature to both sides of the web (film) being conveyed or a method using a heating means such as a microwave.
  • the drying temperature in the drying step is preferably 100 to 145 ° C.
  • the drying temperature, the amount of drying air, and the drying time vary depending on the solvent used, but may be appropriately selected according to the type and combination of the solvents used.
  • the web (film) peeled from the support is preferably stretched when the amount of residual solvent in the web is less than 120% by mass.
  • the residual solvent amount can be expressed by the following formula.
  • Residual solvent amount (% by mass) ⁇ (MN) / N ⁇ ⁇ 100
  • M is the mass of the web at an arbitrary point in time
  • N is the mass when the web of which M is measured is dried at 110 ° C. for 3 hours.
  • the present invention in order to improve the film performance, it may be positively stretched in the width direction.
  • the film is stretched at a temperature 10 to 20 ° C. higher than Tg (glass transition temperature).
  • Tg glass transition temperature
  • the film of the present invention has a high glass transition temperature and is heated to a temperature higher than the glass transition temperature. Decomposition may begin. In such a case, in the present invention, it is particularly effective to stretch the film of the present invention by treatment during drying.
  • stretching can be performed at a temperature at which the polymer does not decompose.
  • the stretching method for example, in the case of stripping, the film is stretched by adjusting the speed of the film transport roller so that the film winding speed is higher than the film stripping speed.
  • the film is stretched by increasing the transport speed of the transport roller at the transport destination relative to the transport speed of the transport roller on the near side in the transport direction. Further, the film can be stretched in the width direction by conveying the film while holding the film with a tenter and gradually increasing the width of the tenter.
  • the stretching ratio of the film is preferably 1.03 to 3 times, more preferably 1.05 to 2.5 times, and more preferably 1.05 to 1.8 times.
  • the stretching direction may be the casting direction, may be stretched in a direction perpendicular to the casting direction, or may be stretched in both directions depending on circumstances. At this time, stretching may be performed simultaneously, or stretching in one direction and then stretching in another direction.
  • the winding machine relating to the production of the cellulose ester film in the present invention may be generally used, such as a constant tension method, a constant torque method, a taper tension method, a program tension control method with a constant internal stress, and the like. Can be rolled up.
  • the thickness of the polymer film in the present invention (after drying) varies depending on the purpose of use, but is usually preferably in the range of 20 to 500 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 30 to 250 ⁇ m, particularly in the range of 30 to 150 ⁇ m. Most preferred.
  • the film thickness may be adjusted by adjusting the solid content concentration contained in the dope, the slit gap of the die base, the extrusion pressure from the die, the support speed, and the like so as to obtain a desired thickness.
  • the stretching speed is preferably 5% / min to 1000% / min, more preferably 10% / min to 500% / min.
  • the stretching is preferably performed by a heat roll or / and a radiant heat source (such as an IR heater) or warm air. Moreover, you may provide a thermostat in order to improve the uniformity of temperature.
  • L / W which is a ratio of the distance between rolls (L) and the film width (W)
  • the width of the dryer should be set so that the hot air and heat source of the dryer do not hit the edges of the web in the dryer. However, it is also preferable that the length is shorter than the width of the web.
  • the stretch ratio for the stretched film should be a predetermined thickness. Further, by stretching, it may be preferable that an improvement in planarity such as flatness can be achieved. Furthermore, in order to reduce the unevenness in thickness, by providing a gradient in the width direction of the stretching temperature, it may be possible to achieve more uniform stretching than stretching at a constant temperature.
  • the cellulose ester film of the present invention Since the cellulose ester film of the present invention has high optical expression, it is preferably used as a retardation film as a protective film for a polarizing plate.
  • the polarizing plate is formed by laminating and laminating a protective film on at least one surface of the polarizer.
  • a conventionally known polarizer can be used.
  • a hydrophilic polymer film such as a polyvinyl alcohol film is treated with a dichroic dye such as iodine and stretched.
  • the bonding of the cellulose ester film and the polarizer is not particularly limited, but can be performed with an adhesive made of an aqueous solution of a water-soluble polymer.
  • the water-soluble polymer adhesive is preferably a completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution.
  • the film of the present invention is a protective film for polarizing plate / polarizer / protective film for polarizing plate / liquid crystal cell / film of the present invention / polarizer / protective film for polarizing plate, or protective film for polarizing plate / polarizer / It can use preferably by the structure of the film / liquid crystal cell of this invention / film of this invention / polarizer / protective film for polarizing plates.
  • a liquid crystal cell such as a TN type, a VA type, or an OCB type
  • a polarizing plate using the protective film for a polarizing plate according to the present invention has little deterioration under high temperature and high humidity conditions, and can maintain stable performance for a long time.
  • the cellulose ester film of the present invention and the polarizing plate using the film can be used for liquid crystal cells and liquid crystal display devices in various display modes.
  • TN Transmission Nematic
  • IPS In-Plane Switching
  • FLC Fluoroelectric Liquid Crystal
  • AFLC Anti-Frequential Liquid Nyst
  • HAN Hybrid Aligned Nematic
  • the OCB mode liquid crystal cell is a liquid crystal display device using a bend alignment mode liquid crystal cell in which rod-like liquid crystalline molecules are aligned in a substantially opposite direction (symmetrically) between the upper part and the lower part of the liquid crystal cell.
  • OCB mode liquid crystal cells are disclosed in US Pat. Nos. 4,583,825 and 5,410,422. Since the rod-like liquid crystal molecules are aligned symmetrically between the upper part and the lower part of the liquid crystal cell, the bend alignment mode liquid crystal cell has a self-optical compensation function.
  • the bend alignment mode liquid crystal display device has an advantage of high response speed.
  • rod-like liquid crystal molecules are aligned substantially vertically when no voltage is applied.
  • the VA mode liquid crystal cell includes: (1) a narrowly defined VA mode liquid crystal cell in which rod-like liquid crystalline molecules are aligned substantially vertically when no voltage is applied, and substantially horizontally when a voltage is applied (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 2-). (2) described in (2) liquid crystal cell (SID97, Digest of tech. Papers 28 (1997) 845 with VA mode multi-domain (MVA mode) for viewing angle expansion. ), (3) a liquid crystal cell (n-ASM mode) in which rod-like liquid crystalline molecules are substantially vertically aligned when no voltage is applied and twisted multi-domain alignment is applied when a voltage is applied (Sharp Technical Report No. 80, page 11); (4) A SURVAVAL mode liquid crystal cell (Monthly Display May 14th page (1999)) is included.
  • the VA mode liquid crystal display device comprises a liquid crystal cell and two polarizing plates disposed on both sides thereof.
  • the liquid crystal cell carries a liquid crystal between two electrode substrates.
  • the film of the present invention is disposed between the liquid crystal cell and one polarizing plate, or between the liquid crystal cell and both polarizing plates. Arrange two.
  • an optical compensation sheet made of the film of the present invention is used as a transparent protective film for a polarizing plate disposed between a liquid crystal cell and a polarizer.
  • the above optical compensation sheet may be used only for the protective film (between the liquid crystal cell and the polarizer) of one polarizing plate, or two (between the liquid crystal cell and the polarizer) of both polarizing plates. You may use said optical compensation sheet for a sheet of protective film.
  • the optical compensation sheet is used for only one polarizing plate, it is particularly preferable to use it as a protective film for the liquid crystal cell side of the backlight side polarizing plate of the liquid crystal cell.
  • the film of the present invention is preferably on the VA cell side.
  • the protective film may be a normal cellulose ester film, and is preferably thinner than the film of the present invention.
  • 40 to 80 ⁇ m is preferable, and examples thereof include, but are not limited to, commercially available KC4UY (40 ⁇ m manufactured by Konica Minolta Opto), KC5UX (60 ⁇ m manufactured by Konica Minolta Opto), TD80 (80 ⁇ m manufactured by Fujifilm), and the like.
  • Example 1 Dope preparation ⁇ 1-1> Cellulose Ester Solution
  • Celite average particle size 10 ⁇ m, particle size standard deviation 3 ⁇ m
  • 0.2% of this filter aid was added to the cellulose ester solution for body feed.
  • a precoat solution having an end speed of 10 ⁇ 3 cm / s was prepared for precoat, and a precoat layer having a thickness of 2 mm and 0.8 kg / m 2 was formed.
  • filtration was started at a filtration flow rate of 0.4 cm / hr and an initial pressure of 0.3 MPa, and filtration was performed until the final thickness of the cake layer was 40 mm.
  • a sintered metal filter having an average filtration accuracy of 3 ⁇ m was used.
  • Cellulose ester 1 listed in Table 3 100 parts by mass Additive 1 10 parts by mass Dichloromethane 406 parts by mass Methanol 61 parts by mass
  • the cellulose ester resin and various additives used as the raw material of the dope were previously prepared by Nara Machinery Co., Ltd. A product obtained by drying at 120 ° C. for 2 hours using a silo made by the method was used.
  • the above dope was cast using a band casting machine. After drying at a supply temperature of 80 to 130 ° C. (exhaust temperature is 75 to 120 ° C.) on the band, a film peeled off from the band with a residual solvent amount of 25 to 35% by mass is supplied to a supply temperature of 130 ° C. (exhaust temperature).
  • a cellulose ester film was produced by stretching in the width direction at a stretching ratio of 30% in a tenter zone having a temperature ranging from 90 to 125 ° C. At this time, the cast film thickness was adjusted so that the film thickness after stretching was 45 ⁇ m.
  • Example 2 Comparative Examples 11 to 14
  • Tables 3 4, 5, and 6, films of each example and comparative example were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that cellulose ester, additives, filter aids, filters, and the like were changed. It was.
  • the content of the additive 1 described in Table 4 is as follows.
  • Additive 1 Succinic acid / adipic acid / ethylene glycol copolymer. Copolymerization ratio 3: 2: 5. Molecular weight 2000.
  • Example 3 The following composition was put into a mixing tank, stirred to dissolve each component, and further heated at 90 ° C. for about 10 minutes. Celite (average particle size 5 ⁇ m, particle size standard deviation 1.5 ⁇ m) was used as a filter aid. 0.2% of this filter aid was added to the cellulose ester solution for body feed. Further, a precoat solution having an end speed of 10 ⁇ 3 cm / s was prepared for precoat, and a precoat layer having a thickness of 2 mm and 0.8 kg / m 2 was formed. Then, filtration was started at a filtration flow rate of 0.4 cm / hr and an initial pressure of 0.3 MPa, and filtration was performed until the final thickness of the cake layer was 40 mm. As the support for the cake layer, a sintered metal filter having an average filtration accuracy of 2 ⁇ m was used.
  • this cast film was peeled off from the cast band, widened to a stretch rate of 30% using a tenter, and then relaxed at 140 ° C. for 60 seconds. Thereafter, the film was sent to a drying chamber and sufficiently dried while being conveyed while being wound around a roller.
  • Examples 4 to 10, 15, 16, 20 and Comparative Examples 17 to 19 As described in Table 3 and Tables 4 to 6 below, in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the cellulose ester, additive, film thickness, filter aid, filter, etc. were changed, A film was obtained.
  • the blank haze 1 of a measuring instrument other than a film is measured.
  • the haze 2 including the sample is measured. 4).
  • Glycerin (0.05 ml) is dropped on a slide glass. 5. A sample film to be measured is placed thereon. 6). Glycerin (0.05 ml) is dropped on the sample film. 7. Place the cover glass on top of it. 8). Set in a haze meter and measure haze 2.
  • (Haze 2) ⁇ (Haze 1) (Internal haze according to the present invention) is calculated.
  • the glass and glycerin used in the above measurement are as follows. Glass: MICRO SLIDE GLASS S9213 MATUNAMI Glycerin: Deer special grade manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd. The above measurement results are shown in Table 6.
  • polarizing plates were produced by the following method.
  • a 120 ⁇ m thick polyvinyl alcohol film was uniaxially stretched (temperature: 110 ° C., stretch ratio: 5 times). This was immersed in an aqueous solution composed of 0.075 g of iodine, 5 g of potassium iodide and 100 g of water for 60 seconds, and then immersed in an aqueous solution of 68 ° C. composed of 6 g of potassium iodide, 7.5 g of boric acid and 100 g of water. This was washed with water and dried to obtain a polarizer.
  • a polarizer, the cellulose ester films 1 to 20, and a commercially available cellulose ester film (KC4UY, manufactured by Konica Minolta Opto Co., Ltd.) are bonded as a polarizing plate protective film on the back side.
  • a plate was made.
  • Step 1 Cellulose ester films 1 to 20 were immersed in a 2 mol / l potassium hydroxide solution at 50 ° C. for 30 seconds, then washed with water and dried to obtain a cellulose ester film having a saponified surface.
  • Step 2 The polarizer was immersed in a polyvinyl alcohol adhesive tank having a solid content of 2% by mass for 1 to 2 seconds.
  • Step 3 Excess adhesive adhered to the polarizer in Step 2 was lightly wiped off, and this was placed on the cellulose ester film treated in Step 1, and further placed on the back side cellulose ester film.
  • Step 4 The cellulose ester films 1 to 20, the polarizer and the back side cellulose ester film laminated in Step 3 were bonded at a pressure of 20 to 30 N / cm 2 and a conveying speed of about 2 m / min.
  • Step 5 A sample obtained by bonding the polarizer prepared in Step 4 with the cellulose ester films 1 to 20 and the back side cellulose ester film in a drier at 80 ° C. was dried for 2 minutes to prepare a polarizing plate.
  • a liquid crystal panel for viewing angle measurement was produced as follows, and the characteristics as a liquid crystal display device were evaluated.
  • the liquid crystal display devices 101 to 120 were manufactured by performing the absorption axis in the same direction as the polarizing plate bonded in advance.
  • the liquid crystal display device was evaluated for contrast, and the results are shown in Table 7.
  • Front contrast (brightness of white display measured from normal direction of display device) / (brightness of black display measured from normal direction of display device)
  • the evaluation rank of contrast was determined as follows. A: 1100 to 1200 or more ⁇ : 1000 to less than 1100 ⁇ : less than 1000 ⁇ If it is greater than or equal to ⁇ , there is no practical problem.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)
  • Manufacture Of Macromolecular Shaped Articles (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a cellulose ester film with high transmittance, and a production method therefor. Further, provided are a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film, and a liquid crystal display with high contrast. This cellulose ester film contains a cellulose ester including an acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and the substitution degree of the acyl group is 2.0 to 2.5. The cellulose ester film is characterized in that the number of foreign bodies having a diameter translated into circle in the range of 60 to 100 μ is 10 pieces or less per 10 cm2, the number of foreign bodies having a diameter translated into circle in the range of 10 to 50 μ is 10 pieces or less per 10 cm2, the internal haze is 0.1 or less, and the thickness is in the range of 20 to 50 μm.

Description

セルロースエステルフィルム、その製造方法、それが具備された偏光板及び液晶表示装置Cellulose ester film, method for producing the same, polarizing plate provided with the same, and liquid crystal display device
 本発明は、セルロースエステルフィルム、その製造方法、当該セルロースエステルフィルムが具備された偏光板及び液晶表示装置に関する。より詳しくは、透過率の高いセルロースエステルフィルム、その製造方法、当該セルロースエステルフィルムが具備された偏光板及びコントラストの高い液晶表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a cellulose ester film, a method for producing the same, a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film, and a liquid crystal display device. More specifically, the present invention relates to a cellulose ester film having a high transmittance, a production method thereof, a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film, and a liquid crystal display device having a high contrast.
 液晶表示装置は、液晶テレビやパソコンの液晶ディスプレイ等の用途で、需要が拡大している。通常、液晶表示装置は、透明電極、液晶層、カラーフィルタ等をガラス板で挟み込んだ液晶セルと、その両側に設けられた二枚の偏光板で構成されており、それぞれの偏光板は、偏光子を二枚の光学フィルムで挟まれた構成となっている。この光学フィルムには、通常、セルロースエステルフィルムが用いられている。 Demand for liquid crystal display devices is expanding for applications such as liquid crystal televisions and personal computer liquid crystal displays. Usually, a liquid crystal display device is composed of a liquid crystal cell in which a transparent electrode, a liquid crystal layer, a color filter, etc. are sandwiched between glass plates, and two polarizing plates provided on both sides thereof. The child is sandwiched between two optical films. A cellulose ester film is usually used for this optical film.
 この液晶表示装置用光学フィルムは、液晶表示装置の大型化と普及により、年々生産量が増大しており、それに対応すべく、フィルム幅の拡大、フィルムの長尺化、それに伴う製膜プロセスの高速化が、検討実施されている。 This optical film for liquid crystal display devices is increasing in production year by year due to the increase in size and spread of liquid crystal display devices. In order to cope with this, the film width is increased, the film length is increased, and the film forming process associated therewith is increased. Speeding up is being studied.
 また近年の技術の進歩により、液晶表示装置の大型化や高機能化が加速するとともに、コントラスト向上が求められていた。 Also, due to recent technological advancement, liquid crystal display devices have been increased in size and functionality, and there has been a demand for improved contrast.
 しかし、セルロースエステルフィルムを製膜する際に、エステル化が不十分な未酢化物が不溶解物となり、その異物の屈折率が主のセルロースエステルの屈折率と異なるため、偏光状態を阻害し、異常発光する欠陥となっていた。 However, when the cellulose ester film is formed, unacetylated material that is insufficiently esterified becomes insoluble, and the refractive index of the foreign matter is different from the refractive index of the main cellulose ester, thereby inhibiting the polarization state, It was a defect that caused abnormal light emission.
 特許文献1には、セルロースエステルドープを減圧脱気し、濾過助剤を使用することでフィルムの透明性を向上させるという方法が記載されているが、濾過後のドープ中に粒径の小さい濾過助剤が残ってしまうことで、フィルムが白濁し、コントラスト改善には直接にはつながらないことがわかった。 Patent Document 1 describes a method of degassing cellulose ester dope under reduced pressure and improving the transparency of the film by using a filter aid, but filtration with a small particle size in the dope after filtration. It was found that the film remained cloudy because the auxiliary agent remained, and it did not directly lead to improvement in contrast.
 一方、特許文献2には、濾過助剤が濾過後のドープに混入しないよう、フィルタを設置するという方法が記載されているが、置換度の高いセルローストリアセテート(TAC)はこの方法でも充分であったが、置換度が低いジアセチルセルロース(DAC)やセルロースアセテートプロピオネート(CAP)などはより未酢化物が増えるため、更なる改善が求められていた。また、濾過助剤がフィルタに詰まってしまうことで、濾過効率が落ちてしまい、生産性向上につながらないことがあることも分かった。 On the other hand, Patent Document 2 describes a method of installing a filter so that the filter aid is not mixed into the dope after filtration. However, cellulose triacetate (TAC) having a high degree of substitution is sufficient. However, diacetylcellulose (DAC), cellulose acetate propionate (CAP), and the like having a low degree of substitution are required to be further improved because the amount of non-acetylated product increases. It has also been found that the filter aid is clogged with the filter, resulting in a decrease in filtration efficiency and no improvement in productivity.
特開2007-69420号公報JP 2007-69420 A 特開2004-107629号公報JP 2004-107629 A
 本発明は、上記問題・状況にかんがみてなされたものであり、その解決課題は、透過率の高いセルロースエステルフィルムとその製造方法を提供することである。また、当該セルロースエステルフィルムが具備された偏光板及びコントラストの高い液晶表示装置を提供することである。 The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems and situations, and a solution to that problem is to provide a cellulose ester film having a high transmittance and a method for producing the same. Another object of the present invention is to provide a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film and a liquid crystal display device with high contrast.
 本発明に係る上記課題は、以下の手段により解決される。 The above-mentioned problem according to the present invention is solved by the following means.
 1.炭素数が2~4の範囲内であるアシル基を有し、かつアシル基置換度が2.0~2.5の範囲内であるセルロースエステルを含有するセルロースエステルフィルムであって、円換算直径が60~100μmの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下であり、円換算直径が10~50μmの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下であり、内部ヘイズが0.1以下であり、かつ厚さが20~50μmの範囲内であることを特徴とするセルロースエステルフィルム。 1. A cellulose ester film containing a cellulose ester having an acyl group having a carbon number in the range of 2 to 4 and an acyl group substitution degree in the range of 2.0 to 2.5, and having a diameter in terms of a circle Is 10 or less per 10 cm square, and 10 or less foreign matter is 10 to 50 μm in diameter, and the internal haze is 0.1 or less. And a cellulose ester film having a thickness in the range of 20 to 50 μm.
 2.下記式(1)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するコア層と下記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含むスキンB層とが積層製膜されたセルロースエステルフィルムであることを特徴とする前記第1項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。
式(1):2.0<Z<2.5
(式(1)中、Zはコア層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
式(2):2.7<Z<3.0
(式(2)中、Zはスキン層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
 3.前記積層製膜されたコア層のスキンB層がある面とは反対側の面上に、下記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するスキンA層を有することを特徴とする前記第1項又は第2項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。
式(2):2.7<Z<3.0
(式(2)中、Zはスキン層のセルロースエステルの総アシル置換度を表す。)
 4.フィルムの長さが、5000~10000mの範囲内であり、当該フィルムの幅が1.9~2.5mの範囲内であることを特徴とする前記第1項から第3項までのいずれか一項項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。
2. The said 1st item | term characterized by being the cellulose ester film by which the core layer containing the cellulose ester which satisfy | fills following formula (1), and the skin B layer containing the cellulose ester which satisfy | fills following formula (2) were laminated | stacked and formed. The cellulose ester film described in 1.
Formula (1): 2.0 <Z 1 <2.5
(In the formula (1), Z 1 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the core layer.)
Formula (2): 2.7 <Z 2 <3.0
(In the formula (2), Z 2 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.)
3. The said 1st item | term characterized by having the skin A layer containing the cellulose ester which satisfy | fills following formula (2) on the surface on the opposite side to the surface with the skin B layer of the said laminated | stacked core layer. Or the cellulose-ester film of a 2nd term | claim.
Formula (2): 2.7 <Z 2 <3.0
(In the formula (2), Z 2 represents a total degree of acyl substitution of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.)
4). The length of the film is in the range of 5000 to 10,000 m, and the width of the film is in the range of 1.9 to 2.5 m. The cellulose ester film of item.
 5.平均粒径が5~20μmの範囲内であり、粒径標準偏差が平均粒径の0.5倍以下の濾過助剤と濾過精度が1~5μmの範囲内であるフィルタを用いて濾過する工程を経て製造されたことを特徴とする前記第1項から第4項までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。 5. Filtering using a filter aid having an average particle size in the range of 5 to 20 μm, a particle size standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle size, and a filter having a filtration accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 μm The cellulose ester film according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the cellulose ester film is produced through the process.
 6.前記第1項から第5項までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルムを製造するセルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法であって、平均粒径が5~20μmの範囲内であり、粒径標準偏差が平均粒径の0.5倍以下の濾過助剤と、濾過精度が1~5μmの範囲内であるフィルタを用いて濾過する工程を有することを特徴とするセルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法。 6. A method for producing a cellulose ester film according to any one of items 1 to 5, wherein the average particle size is in the range of 5 to 20 μm, and the standard deviation of particle size A method for producing a cellulose ester film, comprising a step of filtering using a filter aid having a mean particle size of 0.5 times or less and a filter having a filtration accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 μm.
 7.前記第1項から第5項までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルムが具備されたことを特徴とする偏光板。 7. A polarizing plate comprising the cellulose ester film according to any one of items 1 to 5 above.
 8.前記第1項から第5項までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルムが具備されたことを特徴とする液晶表示装置。 8. A liquid crystal display device comprising the cellulose ester film according to any one of items 1 to 5.
 本発明の上記手段により、透過率の高いセルロースエステルフィルムとその製造方法を提供することができる。また、当該セルロースエステルフィルムが具備された偏光板及びコントラストの高い液晶表示装置を提供することができる。 The above-described means of the present invention can provide a cellulose ester film having a high transmittance and a method for producing the same. In addition, a polarizing plate provided with the cellulose ester film and a liquid crystal display device with high contrast can be provided.
共流延ダイ、及び流延して多層構造ウェブを形成したところを表した図Co-casting die and a diagram showing a multi-layered web formed by casting
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムは、炭素数が2~4の範囲内であるアシル基を有し、かつアシル基置換度が2.0~2.5の範囲内であるセルロースエステルを含有するセルロースエステルフィルムであって、円換算直径が60~100μmの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下であり、円換算直径が10~50μmの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下であり、内部ヘイズが0.1以下であり、かつ厚さが20~50μmの範囲内であることを特徴とする。この特徴は、請求項1から請求項8までの請求項に係る発明に共通する技術的特徴である。 The cellulose ester film of the present invention contains a cellulose ester having an acyl group having a carbon number in the range of 2 to 4 and an acyl group substitution degree in the range of 2.0 to 2.5. The number of foreign matters having a circle-equivalent diameter in the range of 60 to 100 μm is 10 or less per 10 cm square, and the number of foreign matters having a circle-equivalent diameter in the range of 10 to 50 μm is 10 or less per 10 cm square. The internal haze is 0.1 or less and the thickness is in the range of 20 to 50 μm. This feature is a technical feature common to the inventions according to claims 1 to 8.
 本発明の実施態様としては、本発明の効果発現の観点から、前記式(1)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するコア層とした前記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含むスキンB層とが積層製膜されたセルロースエステルフィルムであることであることが好ましい。さらに、前記積層製膜されたコア層のスキンB層がある面とは反対側の面上に、前記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するスキンA層を有することが好ましい。 As an embodiment of the present invention, a skin B layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the above formula (2) is laminated as a core layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the above formula (1) from the viewpoint of the effect of the present invention. The film is preferably a formed cellulose ester film. Furthermore, it is preferable to have the skin A layer containing the cellulose ester which satisfy | fills said Formula (2) on the surface on the opposite side to the surface with the skin B layer of the core layer formed by said lamination | stacking.
 本発明においては、フィルムの長さが、5000~10000mの範囲内であり、当該フィルムの幅が1.9~2.5mの範囲内であることが好ましい。また、平均粒径が5~20μmの範囲内であり、粒径標準偏差が平均粒径の0.5倍以下の濾過助剤と濾過精度が1~5μmの範囲内であるフィルタを用いて濾過する工程を経て製造されたものであることが好ましい。 In the present invention, the length of the film is preferably in the range of 5000 to 10000 m, and the width of the film is preferably in the range of 1.9 to 2.5 m. Further, filtration is performed using a filter aid having an average particle size in the range of 5 to 20 μm, a particle size standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle size, and a filter having a filtration accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 μm. It is preferable that it is manufactured through the process of performing.
 したがって、本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムを製造するセルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法としては、平均粒径が5~20μmの範囲内であり、粒径標準偏差が平均粒径の0.5倍以下の濾過助剤と濾過精度が1~5μmの範囲内であるフィルタを用いて濾過する工程を有する態様の製造方法であることが好ましい。 Therefore, as a method for producing a cellulose ester film of the present invention, a filter aid having an average particle diameter in the range of 5 to 20 μm and a particle diameter standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle diameter is used. It is preferable that the production method has an aspect including a step of filtering using an agent and a filter having a filtration accuracy within the range of 1 to 5 μm.
 なお、本願において、「コア層」とは、セルロースエステルフィルムが三層以上積層された層で構成される場合、積層された層のうち内部側にある層をいう。その層厚は外部側にあるスキン層より厚いことが好ましい。なお、セルロースエステルフィルムが二層構成である場合は、最も層厚が厚い層を「コア層」とする。 In addition, in this application, a "core layer" means the layer which exists in the inside among the laminated | stacked layers, when a cellulose ester film is comprised by the layer laminated | stacked three or more layers. The layer thickness is preferably thicker than the skin layer on the outside. When the cellulose ester film has a two-layer structure, the thickest layer is referred to as a “core layer”.
 一方、「スキン層」とは、セルロースエステルフィルムが三層以上積層された層で構成される場合、積層された層のうち外表面側にある層をいう。その層厚は内部側にあるコア層より薄いことが好ましい。 On the other hand, the “skin layer” refers to a layer on the outer surface side of the laminated layers when the cellulose ester film is composed of three or more layers. The layer thickness is preferably thinner than the core layer on the inner side.
 また、本願において、「スキン層」という場合は、「スキンA層」及び「スキンB層」を共に指す。ただし、前記「スキンA層」を「エア面層」ということがあり、前記「スキンB層」を「支持体面層」ということもある。さらに、「コア層」を「基層」ということがある。 In the present application, the term “skin layer” refers to both “skin A layer” and “skin B layer”. However, the “skin A layer” may be referred to as an “air surface layer”, and the “skin B layer” may be referred to as a “support surface layer”. Furthermore, the “core layer” may be referred to as a “base layer”.
 また、本発明においては、フィルムサンプルを光学顕微鏡によって150倍で観察し、100mm内の円換算直径60~100μm、円換算直径10~50μmの範囲内の輝点異物の数をそれぞれ数え、これをフィルムの異物数とした。ここで、「輝点異物」とは、セルロースエステルフィルムの両側に透過光を遮断するように二枚の偏光板を配置した場合に、この偏光板を透過する光によって形成されるスポットを意味し、一般にフィルム中の異物の存在によって偏光作用が充分に機能しないために生じる。当該輝点異物の数は光学顕微鏡により測定することができる。 Further, in the present invention, the film sample is observed with an optical microscope at a magnification of 150 times, and the number of bright spot foreign matters within the range of a circle converted diameter of 60 to 100 μm and a circle converted diameter of 10 to 50 μm within 100 mm 2 is counted. Was the number of foreign objects on the film. Here, “bright spot foreign matter” means a spot formed by light transmitted through the polarizing plate when two polarizing plates are arranged on both sides of the cellulose ester film so as to block the transmitted light. In general, the polarizing action does not function sufficiently due to the presence of foreign matter in the film. The number of the bright spot foreign matters can be measured with an optical microscope.
 また、「円換算直径」とは、光学顕微鏡で観察された輝点異物の投影面積を円の面積として換算して得られる直径をいう。 Further, the “circle converted diameter” means a diameter obtained by converting the projected area of the bright spot foreign matter observed with an optical microscope as the area of the circle.
 また、「粒径標準偏差が平均粒径の0.5倍以下の濾過助剤」とは、粒径の標準偏差が平均粒径×0.5以下である濾過助剤のことをいう。標準偏差が小さいほど、濾過助剤の粒径のばらつきが少ないので、フィルムが白濁したり、濾過効率が下がったりすることが起こりづらい。 In addition, “filter aid having a particle size standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle size” means a filter aid having a standard deviation of particle size of the average particle size × 0.5 or less. The smaller the standard deviation, the smaller the variation in the particle size of the filter aid, so that it is difficult for the film to become cloudy or to reduce the filtration efficiency.
 以下、本発明とその構成要素、及び本発明を実施するための形態・態様について詳細な説明をする。なお、本願において、「~」は、その前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用する。 Hereinafter, the present invention, its components, and modes and modes for carrying out the present invention will be described in detail. In the present application, “˜” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
 (セルロースエステルフィルム)
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムは、炭素数が2~4の範囲内であるアシル基を有し、かつアシル基置換度が2.0~2.5の範囲内であるセルロースエステルを含有するセルロースエステルフィルムであって、円換算直径が60~100μの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下、円換算直径が10~50μの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下であり、内部ヘイズが0.1以下であり、かつ厚さが20~50μmの範囲内であることを特徴とする。
(Cellulose ester film)
The cellulose ester film of the present invention contains a cellulose ester having an acyl group having a carbon number in the range of 2 to 4 and an acyl group substitution degree in the range of 2.0 to 2.5. The film has 10 or less foreign matter with a circle converted diameter of 60 to 100μ per 10 cm square, and 10 or less foreign materials with a circle converted diameter of 10 to 50μ per 10 cm square. The haze is 0.1 or less and the thickness is in the range of 20 to 50 μm.
 本発明の実施態様としては、本発明の効果発現の観点から、下記式(1)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するコア層と下記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含むスキンB層とが積層製膜されたセルロースエステルフィルムであることであることが好ましい。 As an embodiment of the present invention, a core layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (1) and a skin B layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (2) are laminated from the viewpoint of manifesting the effects of the present invention. It is preferable that it is a film-formed cellulose ester film.
 式(1):2.0<Z<2.5
(式(1)中、Zはコア層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
 式(2):2.7<Z<3.0
(式(2)中、Zはスキン層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
 本発明においては、さらに、前記積層製膜されたコア層のスキンB層がある面とは反対側の面上に、前記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するスキンA層を有することが、フィルムの物理的性質(カール)を好適に制御する観点から好ましい。
Formula (1): 2.0 <Z 1 <2.5
(In the formula (1), Z 1 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the core layer.)
Formula (2): 2.7 <Z 2 <3.0
(In the formula (2), Z 2 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.)
In the present invention, a skin A layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the formula (2) may be further provided on a surface opposite to the surface on which the skin B layer of the core layer formed by lamination is provided. From the viewpoint of suitably controlling the physical properties (curl) of the film.
 なお、コア層又はスキン層の少なくとも一方にリターデーション調整剤を添加して延伸することも好ましい態様であり、共流延では技術的不可避なコア層及びスキン層の膜厚の部分変動が生じてしまった場合であっても、積層フィルム全体の光学特性が受ける影響を抑制し、Ro及びRtのバラツキを抑えることができる。 In addition, it is also a preferable aspect to add a retardation adjusting agent to at least one of the core layer or the skin layer and stretch it, and the co-casting causes technically inevitable partial variations in the thickness of the core layer and the skin layer. Even if it is a case, the influence which the optical characteristic of the whole laminated film receives is suppressed, and the variation of Ro and Rt can be suppressed.
 したがって、従来のセルロースエステルフィルムに比べ、本発明のセルロースエステル積層フィルムは、光学特性の発現性が高く、かつ、光学特性のバラツキが非常に小さい。 Therefore, compared with the conventional cellulose ester film, the cellulose ester laminated film of the present invention has high expression of optical properties and very little variation in optical properties.
 以下、本発明のフィルムの特徴と好ましい態様について詳細な説明をする。 Hereinafter, the features and preferred embodiments of the film of the present invention will be described in detail.
 (セルロースエステル)
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムは、炭素数が2~4の範囲内であるアシル基を有し、かつアシル基置換度が2.0~2.5の範囲内であるセルロースエステルを含有することを要するが、炭素数が2~4の範囲内であるアシル基としては、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、及びブタノイル基を挙げることができる。
(Cellulose ester)
The cellulose ester film of the present invention contains a cellulose ester having an acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms and an acyl group substitution degree of 2.0 to 2.5. In short, examples of the acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms include an acetyl group, a propionyl group, and a butanoyl group.
 セルロースを構成するβ-1,4結合しているグルコース単位は、2位、3位及び6位に遊離のヒドロキシ基(水酸基)を有している。セルロースエステルは、これらのヒドロキシ基(水酸基)の一部又は全部をアシル基によりアシル化した重合体(ポリマー)である。アシル基総置換度は、グルコース単位一つあたり、2位、3位及び6位に位置するセルロースのヒドロキシ基(水酸基)のすべてがアシル化している割合(100%のアシル化は置換度3)を意味する。 The β-1,4-bonded glucose unit constituting cellulose has free hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions. The cellulose ester is a polymer obtained by acylating part or all of these hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) with an acyl group. The total acyl group substitution degree is the ratio in which all of the hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) of cellulose located at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions are acylated per glucose unit (100% acylation has a degree of substitution of 3). Means.
 本発明の実施態様としては、下記式(1)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するコア層と下記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含むスキンB層とが積層製膜されたセルロースエステルフィルムであることであることが好ましい。 An embodiment of the present invention is a cellulose ester film in which a core layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (1) and a skin B layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (2) are laminated and formed. It is preferable that
 式(1):2.0<Z<2.5
(式(1)中、Zはコア層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
 式(2):2.7<Z<3.0
(式(2)中、Zはスキン層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
 本発明においては、さらに、前記積層製膜されたコア層のスキンB層がある面とは反対側の面上に、前記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するスキンA層を有することが、フィルムの物理的性質(カール)を好適に制御する観点から好ましい。
Formula (1): 2.0 <Z 1 <2.5
(In the formula (1), Z 1 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the core layer.)
Formula (2): 2.7 <Z 2 <3.0
(In the formula (2), Z 2 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.)
In the present invention, a skin A layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the formula (2) may be further provided on a surface opposite to the surface on which the skin B layer of the core layer formed by lamination is provided. From the viewpoint of suitably controlling the physical properties (curl) of the film.
 なお、前記Zは、2.1≦Z≦2.45を満たすことが好ましい。 The Z 1 preferably satisfies 2.1 ≦ Z 1 ≦ 2.45.
 前記Zは、2.75≦Z≦2.95を満たすことがより好ましく、2.80≦Z2≦2.95を満たすことが特に好ましい。 The Z 2 preferably satisfies 2.75 ≦ Z 2 ≦ 2.95, and particularly preferably satisfies 2.80 ≦ Z2 ≦ 2.95.
 本発明においては、上記要件を満たす限りにおいて、スキン層及びコア層に含有させるセルロースエステルは、下記のアシル基を有することができ、脂肪族基でもアリール基でもよく特に限定されない。例えば、セルロースのアルキルカルボニルエステル、アルケニルカルボニルエステルあるいは芳香族カルボニルエステル、芳香族アルキルカルボニルエステルなどであり、それぞれさらに置換された基を有していてもよい。 In the present invention, as long as the above requirements are satisfied, the cellulose ester contained in the skin layer and the core layer can have the following acyl group, and may be an aliphatic group or an aryl group, and is not particularly limited. For example, cellulose alkylcarbonyl ester, alkenylcarbonyl ester, aromatic carbonyl ester, aromatic alkylcarbonyl ester and the like, each of which may further have a substituted group.
 好ましいアシル基の例としては、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブタノイル基、ヘプタノイル基、ヘキサノイル基、オクタノイル基、デカノイル基、ドデカノイル基、トリデカノイル基、テトラデカノイル基、ヘキサデカノイル基、オクタデカノイル基、イソブタノイル基、tert-ブタノイル基、シクロヘキサンカルボニル基、オレオイル基、ベンゾイル基、ナフチルカルボニル基、シンナモイル基などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブタノイル基、ドデカノイル基、オクタデカノイル基、tert-ブタノイル基、オレオイル基、ベンゾイル基、ナフチルカルボニル基、シンナモイル基などがより好ましく、特に好ましくはアセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブタノイル基(アシル基が炭素原子数2~4である場合)であり、より特に好ましくはアセチル基(セルロースエステルが、セルロースアセテートである場合)である。 Examples of preferred acyl groups include acetyl, propionyl, butanoyl, heptanoyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl, decanoyl, dodecanoyl, tridecanoyl, tetradecanoyl, hexadecanoyl, octadecanoyl, Examples thereof include an isobutanoyl group, a tert-butanoyl group, a cyclohexanecarbonyl group, an oleoyl group, a benzoyl group, a naphthylcarbonyl group, and a cinnamoyl group. Among these, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butanoyl group, a dodecanoyl group, an octadecanoyl group, a tert-butanoyl group, an oleoyl group, a benzoyl group, a naphthylcarbonyl group, a cinnamoyl group, and the like are more preferable, and an acetyl group is particularly preferable. A propionyl group and a butanoyl group (when the acyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms) are more preferable, and an acetyl group (when the cellulose ester is cellulose acetate) is more preferable.
 セルロースのアシル化において、アシル化剤としては、酸無水物や酸クロライドを用いた場合、反応溶媒である有機溶媒としては、有機酸、例えば、酢酸、メチレンクロライド等が使用される。 In the acylation of cellulose, when an acid anhydride or acid chloride is used as an acylating agent, an organic acid such as acetic acid or methylene chloride is used as an organic solvent as a reaction solvent.
 触媒としては、アシル化剤が酸無水物である場合には、硫酸のようなプロトン性触媒が好ましく用いられ、アシル化剤が酸クロライド(例えば、CHCHCOCl)である場合には、塩基性化合物が用いられる。 As the catalyst, when the acylating agent is an acid anhydride, a protic catalyst such as sulfuric acid is preferably used, and when the acylating agent is an acid chloride (for example, CH 3 CH 2 COCl), Basic compounds are used.
 本発明に用いられるセルロースエステルの数平均分子量(Mn)は、30000~300000の範囲が、得られるフィルムの機械的強度が強く好ましい。更に50000~200000のものが好ましく用いられる。 The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cellulose ester used in the present invention is preferably in the range of 30000 to 300000, since the mechanical strength of the resulting film is strong. Further, those having 50000-200000 are preferably used.
 セルロースエステルの重量平均分子量(Mw)と数平均分子量(Mn)の比Mw/Mnの値は、1.4~3.0であることが好ましい。 The ratio Mw / Mn of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cellulose ester is preferably 1.4 to 3.0.
 最も一般的なセルロースの混合脂肪酸エステルの工業的合成方法は、セルロースをアセチル基及び他のアシル基に対応する脂肪酸(酢酸、プロピオン酸、吉草酸等)又はそれらの酸無水物を含有する混合有機酸成分でアシル化する方法である。 The most common industrial synthesis method of mixed fatty acid esters of cellulose is cellulose mixed organics containing fatty acids corresponding to acetyl groups and other acyl groups (acetic acid, propionic acid, valeric acid, etc.) or acid anhydrides thereof. This is a method of acylating with an acid component.
 本発明に用いるセルロースエステルは、例えば、特開平10-45804号公報に記載されている方法により合成できる。 The cellulose ester used in the present invention can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in JP-A-10-45804.
 市販品としては、ダイセル化学工業のL20、L30、L40、L50、イーストマンケミカル社のCa398-3、Ca398-6、Ca398-10、Ca398-30、Ca394-60Sが挙げられる。 Commercially available products include L20, L30, L40, and L50 from Daicel Chemical Industries, and Ca398-3, Ca398-6, Ca398-10, Ca398-30, and Ca394-60S from Eastman Chemical.
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルム中には、リターデーション調整剤(リターデーション発現剤及びリターデーション低減剤)、フタル酸エステル、リン酸エステルなどの可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、マット剤などの添加剤を加えることもできる。 In the cellulose ester film of the present invention, a retardation adjusting agent (a retardation developing agent and a retardation reducing agent), a plasticizer such as a phthalate ester and a phosphate ester, an ultraviolet absorber, an antioxidant, a matting agent, etc. Additives can also be added.
 <添加剤>
 <リターデーション調整剤>
 リターデーション調整剤としては、特に制限はなく、可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、マット剤などの添加剤がリターデーション調整剤としても用いられる場合、これらの添加剤は本発明におけるリターデーション調整剤に含まれる。
<Additives>
<Retardation adjuster>
The retardation adjusting agent is not particularly limited, and when additives such as a plasticizer, an ultraviolet absorber, an antioxidant, and a matting agent are also used as the retardation adjusting agent, these additives are used in the present invention. Included in modifier.
 (リターデーション発現剤)
 本発明ではリターデーション値を発現するために、棒状又は円盤状化合物からなるものを挙げることができる。上記棒状又は円盤状化合物としては、少なくとも二つの芳香族環を有する化合物をリターデーション発現剤として好ましく用いることができる。
(Retardation expression agent)
In this invention, in order to express a retardation value, what consists of a rod-shaped or a disk shaped compound can be mentioned. As the rod-like or discotic compound, a compound having at least two aromatic rings can be preferably used as a retardation developer.
 棒状化合物からなるリターデーション発現剤の添加量は、セルロースアシレートを含有するポリマー成分100質量部に対して0.1~30質量部であることが好ましく、0.5~20質量部であることがさらに好ましい。円盤状のリターデーション発現剤は、前記セルロースアシレートを含有するポリマー成分100質量部に対して、0.05~20質量部の範囲で使用することが好ましく、1.0~15質量部の範囲で使用することがより好ましく、3.0~10質量部の範囲で使用することがさらに好ましい。 The addition amount of the retardation developer composed of a rod-shaped compound is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass, and preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component containing cellulose acylate. Is more preferable. The disk-like retardation developer is preferably used in the range of 0.05 to 20 parts by mass, and in the range of 1.0 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component containing cellulose acylate. It is more preferable to use in the range of 3.0 to 10 parts by mass.
 円盤状化合物はリターデーション発現性において棒状化合物よりも優れているため、特に大きなリターデーションを必要とする場合には好ましく使用される。二種類以上のリターデーション発現剤を併用してもよい。 Since a discotic compound is superior to a rod-shaped compound in terms of retardation development, it is preferably used when particularly large retardation is required. Two or more types of retardation developing agents may be used in combination.
 リターデーション発現剤は、250~400nmの波長領域に最大吸収を有することが好ましく、可視領域に実質的に吸収を有していないことが好ましい。 The retardation developer preferably has a maximum absorption in the wavelength region of 250 to 400 nm, and preferably has substantially no absorption in the visible region.
 円盤状化合物について説明する。円盤状化合物としては少なくとも二つの芳香族環を有する化合物を用いることができる。 The discotic compound will be described. As the discotic compound, a compound having at least two aromatic rings can be used.
 本明細書において、「芳香族環」は、芳香族炭化水素環に加えて、芳香族性ヘテロ環を含む。 In the present specification, the “aromatic ring” includes an aromatic heterocycle in addition to an aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
 芳香族炭化水素環は、6員環(すなわち、ベンゼン環)であることが特に好ましい。 The aromatic hydrocarbon ring is particularly preferably a 6-membered ring (that is, a benzene ring).
 芳香族性ヘテロ環は一般に、不飽和ヘテロ環である。芳香族性ヘテロ環は、5員環、6員環又は7員環であることが好ましく、5員環又は6員環であることがさらに好ましい。芳香族性ヘテロ環は一般に、最多の二重結合を有する。ヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子及び硫黄原子が好ましく、窒素原子が特に好ましい。芳香族性ヘテロ環の例には、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピロール環、オキサゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イソチアゾール環、イミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、フラザン環、トリアゾール環、ピラン環、ピリジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環及び1,3,5-トリアジン環が含まれる。 The aromatic heterocycle is generally an unsaturated heterocycle. The aromatic heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring. Aromatic heterocycles generally have the most double bonds. As the hetero atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable, and a nitrogen atom is particularly preferable. Examples of aromatic heterocycles include furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, furazane ring, triazole ring, pyran ring, pyridine ring , Pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring and 1,3,5-triazine ring.
 芳香族環としては、ベンゼン環、縮合ベンゼン環、ビフェニール類が好ましい。特に1,3,5-トリアジン環が好ましく用いられる。具体的には例えば特開2001-166144号公報に開示の化合物が好ましく用いられる。 As the aromatic ring, a benzene ring, a condensed benzene ring and biphenyls are preferable. In particular, 1,3,5-triazine ring is preferably used. Specifically, for example, compounds disclosed in JP-A No. 2001-166144 are preferably used.
 リターデーション発現剤が有する芳香族環の炭素数は、2~20であることが好ましく、2~12であることがより好ましく、2~8であることがさらに好ましく、2~6であることが最も好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic ring of the retardation developer is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 12, still more preferably 2 to 8, and more preferably 2 to 6. Most preferred.
 二つの芳香族環の結合関係は、(a)縮合環を形成する場合、(b)単結合で直結する場合及び(c)連結基を介して結合する場合に分類できる(芳香族環のため、スピロ結合は形成できない)。結合関係は、(a)~(c)のいずれでもよい。 The bonding relationship between two aromatic rings can be classified into (a) when forming a condensed ring, (b) when directly connecting with a single bond, and (c) when connecting via a linking group (for aromatic rings). , Spiro bonds cannot be formed). The bond relationship may be any of (a) to (c).
 (a)の縮合環(二つ以上の芳香族環の縮合環)の例には、インデン環、ナフタレン環、アズレン環、フルオレン環、フェナントレン環、アントラセン環、アセナフチレン環、ビフェニレン環、ナフタセン環、ピレン環、インドール環、イソインドール環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、インドリジン環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、プリン環、インダゾール環、クロメン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、キノリジン環、キナゾリン環、シンノリン環、キノキサリン環、フタラジン環、プテリジン環、カルバゾール環、アクリジン環、フェナントリジン環、キサンテン環、フェナジン環、フェノチアジン環、フェノキサチイン環、フェノキサジン環及びチアントレン環が含まれる。ナフタレン環、アズレン環、インドール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環及びキノリン環が好ましい。 Examples of the condensed ring (a condensed ring of two or more aromatic rings) include an indene ring, a naphthalene ring, an azulene ring, a fluorene ring, a phenanthrene ring, an anthracene ring, an acenaphthylene ring, a biphenylene ring, a naphthacene ring, Pyrene ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring, indolizine ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzotriazole ring, purine ring, indazole ring, chromene ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline Ring, quinolidine ring, quinazoline ring, cinnoline ring, quinoxaline ring, phthalazine ring, pteridine ring, carbazole ring, acridine ring, phenanthridine ring, xanthene ring, phenazine ring, phenothiazine ring, phenoxathiin ring, phenoxazine ring and thiant It includes emissions ring. Naphthalene ring, azulene ring, indole ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzotriazole ring and quinoline ring are preferred.
 (b)の単結合は、二つの芳香族環の炭素原子間の結合であることが好ましい。二以上の単結合で二つの芳香族環を結合して、二つの芳香族環の間に脂肪族環又は非芳香族性複素環を形成してもよい。 (B) The single bond is preferably a bond between carbon atoms of two aromatic rings. Two aromatic rings may be bonded by two or more single bonds to form an aliphatic ring or a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring between the two aromatic rings.
 (c)の連結基も、二つの芳香族環の炭素原子と結合することが好ましい。連結基は、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、-CO-、-O-、-NH-、-S-又はそれらの組み合わせであることが好ましい。組み合わせからなる連結基の例を以下に示す。なお、以下の連結基の例の左右の関係は、逆になってもよい。 (C) The linking group is also preferably bonded to carbon atoms of two aromatic rings. The linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, —CO—, —O—, —NH—, —S—, or a combination thereof. Examples of linking groups composed of combinations are shown below. In addition, the relationship between the left and right in the following examples of the linking group may be reversed.
 c1:-CO-O-
 c2:-CO-NH-
 c3:-アルキレン-O-
 c4:-NH-CO-NH-
 c5:-NH-CO-O-
 c6:-O-CO-O-
 c7:-O-アルキレン-O-
 c8:-CO-アルケニレン-
 c9:-CO-アルケニレン-NH-
 c10:-CO-アルケニレン-O-
 c11:-アルキレン-CO-O-アルキレン-O-CO-アルキレン-
 c12:-O-アルキレン-CO-O-アルキレン-O-CO-アルキレン-O-
 c13:-O-CO-アルキレン-CO-O-
 c14:-NH-CO-アルケニレン-
 c15:-O-CO-アルケニレン-
 芳香族環及び連結基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
c1: —CO—O—
c2: —CO—NH—
c3: -alkylene-O-
c4: —NH—CO—NH—
c5: —NH—CO—O—
c6: —O—CO—O—
c7: —O-alkylene-O—
c8: -CO-alkenylene-
c9: —CO-alkenylene-NH—
c10: —CO-alkenylene-O—
c11: -alkylene-CO-O-alkylene-O-CO-alkylene-
c12: —O-alkylene-CO—O-alkylene-O—CO-alkylene-O—
c13: —O—CO-alkylene-CO—O—
c14: —NH—CO-alkenylene—
c15: —O—CO-alkenylene—
The aromatic ring and the linking group may have a substituent.
 置換基の例には、ハロゲン原子(F、Cl、Br、I)、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、シアノ基、アミノ基、ニトロ基、スルホ基、カルバモイル基、スルファモイル基、ウレイド基、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、脂肪族アシル基、脂肪族アシルオキシ基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アルキルチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、脂肪族アミド基、脂肪族スルホンアミド基、脂肪族置換アミノ基、脂肪族置換カルバモイル基、脂肪族置換スルファモイル基、脂肪族置換ウレイド基及び非芳香族性複素環基が含まれる。 Examples of substituents include halogen atoms (F, Cl, Br, I), hydroxy groups, carboxy groups, cyano groups, amino groups, nitro groups, sulfo groups, carbamoyl groups, sulfamoyl groups, ureido groups, alkyl groups, alkenyls. Group, alkynyl group, aliphatic acyl group, aliphatic acyloxy group, alkoxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, alkylthio group, alkylsulfonyl group, aliphatic amide group, aliphatic sulfonamido group, aliphatic substituted amino group An aliphatic substituted carbamoyl group, an aliphatic substituted sulfamoyl group, an aliphatic substituted ureido group, and a non-aromatic heterocyclic group.
 アルキル基の炭素原子数は、1~8であることが好ましい。環状アルキル基よりも鎖状アルキル基の方が好ましく、直鎖状アルキル基が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、さらに置換基(例えば、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルコキシ基、アルキル置換アミノ基)を有していてもよい。アルキル基の(置換アルキル基を含む)例には、メチル基、エチル基、n-ブチル基、n-ヘキシル基、2-ヒドロキシエチル基、4-カルボキシブチル基、2-メトキシエチル基及び2-ジエチルアミノエチル基の各基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-8. A chain alkyl group is preferable to a cyclic alkyl group, and a linear alkyl group is particularly preferable. The alkyl group may further have a substituent (for example, a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl-substituted amino group). Examples of alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups) include methyl, ethyl, n-butyl, n-hexyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 4-carboxybutyl, 2-methoxyethyl and 2-methoxyethyl. Each group of a diethylaminoethyl group is included.
 アルケニル基の炭素原子数は、2~8であることが好ましい。環状アルケニル基よりも鎖状アルケニル基の方が好ましく、直鎖状アルケニル基が特に好ましい。アルケニル基は、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。アルケニル基の例には、ビニル基、アリル基及び1-ヘキセニル基が含まれる。 The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms. A chain alkenyl group is preferable to a cyclic alkenyl group, and a linear alkenyl group is particularly preferable. The alkenyl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the alkenyl group include a vinyl group, an allyl group, and a 1-hexenyl group.
 アルキニル基の炭素原子数は、2~8であることが好ましい。環状アルキニル基よりも鎖状アルキニル基の方が好ましく、直鎖状アルキニル基が特に好ましい。アルキニル基は、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。アルキニル基の例には、エチニル基、1-ブチニル基及び1-ヘキシニル基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkynyl group is preferably 2-8. A chain alkynyl group is preferable to a cyclic alkynyl group, and a linear alkynyl group is particularly preferable. The alkynyl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the alkynyl group include ethynyl group, 1-butynyl group and 1-hexynyl group.
 脂肪族アシル基の炭素原子数は、1~10であることが好ましい。脂肪族アシル基の例には、アセチル基、プロパノイル基及びブタノイル基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic acyl group is preferably 1-10. Examples of the aliphatic acyl group include an acetyl group, a propanoyl group, and a butanoyl group.
 脂肪族アシルオキシ基の炭素原子数は、1~10であることが好ましい。脂肪族アシルオキシ基の例には、アセトキシ基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic acyloxy group is preferably 1-10. Examples of the aliphatic acyloxy group include an acetoxy group.
 アルコキシ基の炭素原子数は、1~8であることが好ましい。アルコキシ基は、さらに置換基(例えば、アルコキシ基)を有していてもよい。アルコキシ基の(置換アルコキシ基を含む)例には、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基及びメトキシエトキシ基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkoxy group is preferably 1-8. The alkoxy group may further have a substituent (for example, an alkoxy group). Examples of the alkoxy group (including a substituted alkoxy group) include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group, and a methoxyethoxy group.
 アルコキシカルボニル基の炭素原子数は、2~10であることが好ましい。アルコキシカルボニル基の例には、メトキシカルボニル基及びエトキシカルボニル基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkoxycarbonyl group is preferably 2 to 10. Examples of the alkoxycarbonyl group include a methoxycarbonyl group and an ethoxycarbonyl group.
 アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基の炭素原子数は、2~10であることが好ましい。アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基の例には、メトキシカルボニルアミノ基及びエトキシカルボニルアミノ基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkoxycarbonylamino group is preferably 2 to 10. Examples of the alkoxycarbonylamino group include a methoxycarbonylamino group and an ethoxycarbonylamino group.
 アルキルチオ基の炭素原子数は、1~12であることが好ましい。アルキルチオ基の例には、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基及びオクチルチオ基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkylthio group is preferably 1-12. Examples of the alkylthio group include a methylthio group, an ethylthio group, and an octylthio group.
 アルキルスルホニル基の炭素原子数は、1~8であることが好ましい。アルキルスルホニル基の例には、メタンスルホニル基及びエタンスルホニル基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkylsulfonyl group is preferably 1-8. Examples of the alkylsulfonyl group include a methanesulfonyl group and an ethanesulfonyl group.
 脂肪族アミド基の炭素原子数は、1~10であることが好ましい。脂肪族アミド基の例には、アセトアミドが含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic amide group is preferably 1-10. Examples of the aliphatic amide group include acetamide.
 脂肪族スルホンアミド基の炭素原子数は、1~8であることが好ましい。脂肪族スルホンアミド基の例には、メタンスルホンアミド基、ブタンスルホンアミド基及びn-オクタンスルホンアミド基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic sulfonamide group is preferably 1-8. Examples of the aliphatic sulfonamido group include a methanesulfonamido group, a butanesulfonamido group, and an n-octanesulfonamido group.
 脂肪族置換アミノ基の炭素原子数は、1~10であることが好ましい。脂肪族置換アミノ基の例には、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基及び2-カルボキシエチルアミノ基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted amino group is preferably 1-10. Examples of the aliphatic substituted amino group include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, and a 2-carboxyethylamino group.
 脂肪族置換カルバモイル基の炭素原子数は、2~10であることが好ましい。脂肪族置換カルバモイル基の例には、メチルカルバモイル基及びジエチルカルバモイル基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic substituted carbamoyl group is preferably 2 to 10. Examples of the aliphatic substituted carbamoyl group include a methylcarbamoyl group and a diethylcarbamoyl group.
 脂肪族置換スルファモイル基の炭素原子数は、1~8であることが好ましい。脂肪族置換スルファモイル基の例には、メチルスルファモイル基及びジエチルスルファモイル基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted sulfamoyl group is preferably 1-8. Examples of the aliphatic substituted sulfamoyl group include a methylsulfamoyl group and a diethylsulfamoyl group.
 脂肪族置換ウレイド基の炭素原子数は、2~10であることが好ましい。脂肪族置換ウレイド基の例には、メチルウレイド基が含まれる。 The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic substituted ureido group is preferably 2 to 10. Examples of the aliphatic substituted ureido group include a methylureido group.
 非芳香族性複素環基の例には、ピペリジノ基及びモルホリノ基が含まれる。 Examples of non-aromatic heterocyclic groups include piperidino groups and morpholino groups.
 リターデーション発現剤の分子量は、300~800であることが好ましい。 The molecular weight of the retardation developer is preferably 300 to 800.
 円盤状化合物として下記一般式(I)で表されるトリアジン化合物を用いることが好ましい。 It is preferable to use a triazine compound represented by the following general formula (I) as the discotic compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 上記一般式(I)中:Rは、各々独立に、オルト位、メタ位及びパラ位の少なくともいずれかに置換基を有する芳香族環又は複素環を表す。 In the general formula (I), each R 1 independently represents an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring having a substituent in at least one of the ortho position, the meta position, and the para position.
 Xは、各々独立に、単結合又はNR-を表す。ここで、Rは、各々独立に、水素原子、置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基又は複素環基を表す。 Each X independently represents a single bond or NR 2 —. Here, each R 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
 Rが表す芳香族環は、フェニル又はナフチルであることが好ましく、フェニルであることが特に好ましい。Rが表す芳香族環はいずれかの置換位置に少なくとも一つの置換基を有してもよい。前記置換基の例には、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、カルボキシ基、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アルケニルオキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルケニルオキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、スルファモイル基、アルキル置換スルファモイル基、アルケニル置換スルファモイル基、アリール置換スルファモイル基、スルオンアミド基、カルバモイル、アルキル置換カルバモイル基、アルケニル置換カルバモイル基、アリール置換カルバモイル基、アミド基、アルキルチオ基、アルケニルチオ基、アリールチオ基及びアシル基が含まれる。 The aromatic ring represented by R 1 is preferably phenyl or naphthyl, and particularly preferably phenyl. The aromatic ring represented by R 1 may have at least one substituent at any substitution position. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, hydroxy group, cyano group, nitro group, carboxy group, alkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, alkenyloxy group, aryloxy group, acyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, Alkenyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, sulfamoyl group, alkyl-substituted sulfamoyl group, alkenyl-substituted sulfamoyl group, aryl-substituted sulfamoyl group, sulfonamide group, carbamoyl, alkyl-substituted carbamoyl group, alkenyl-substituted carbamoyl group, aryl-substituted carbamoyl group, amide Groups, alkylthio groups, alkenylthio groups, arylthio groups and acyl groups.
 Rが表す複素環基は、芳香族性を有することが好ましい。芳香族性を有する複素環は、一般に不飽和複素環であり、好ましくは最多の二重結合を有する複素環である。複素環は5員環、6員環又は7員環であることが好ましく、5員環又は6員環であることがさらに好ましく、6員環であることが最も好ましい。複素環のヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、硫黄原子又は酸素原子であることが好ましく、窒素原子であることが特に好ましい。芳香族性を有する複素環としては、ピリジン環(複素環基としては、2-ピリジル又は4-ピリジル)が特に好ましい。複素環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。複素環基の置換基の例は、上記アリール部分の置換基の例と同様である。 The heterocyclic group represented by R 1 preferably has aromaticity. The heterocycle having aromaticity is generally an unsaturated heterocycle, preferably a heterocycle having the largest number of double bonds. The heterocyclic ring is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring, and most preferably a 6-membered ring. The hetero atom of the heterocyclic ring is preferably a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom, and particularly preferably a nitrogen atom. As the heterocyclic ring having aromaticity, a pyridine ring (2-pyridyl or 4-pyridyl as the heterocyclic group) is particularly preferable. The heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent of the heterocyclic group are the same as the examples of the substituent of the aryl moiety.
 Xが単結合である場合の複素環基は、窒素原子に遊離原子価をもつ複素環基であることが好ましい。窒素原子に遊離原子価をもつ複素環基は、5員環、6員環又は7員環であることが好ましく、5員環又は6員環であることがさらに好ましく、5員環であることが最も好ましい。複素環基は、複数の窒素原子を有していてもよい。また、複素環基は、窒素原子以外のヘテロ原子(例えば、O、S)を有していてもよい。以下に、窒素原子に遊離原子価をもつ複素環基の例を示す。ここで、-Cnは、n-Cを示す。 When X is a single bond, the heterocyclic group is preferably a heterocyclic group having a free valence on the nitrogen atom. The heterocyclic group having a free valence on the nitrogen atom is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring, and a 5-membered ring. Is most preferred. The heterocyclic group may have a plurality of nitrogen atoms. Further, the heterocyclic group may have a hetero atom other than the nitrogen atom (for example, O, S). Examples of heterocyclic groups having free valences on nitrogen atoms are shown below. Here, —C 4 H 9 n represents nC 4 H 9 .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 Rが表すアルキル基は、環状アルキル基であっても鎖状アルキル基であってもよいが、鎖状アルキル基が好ましく、分岐を有する鎖状アルキル基よりも、直鎖状アルキル基がより好ましい。アルキル基の炭素原子数は、1~30であることが好ましく、1~20であることがより好ましく、1~10であることがさらに好ましく、1~8がさらにまた好ましく、1~6であることが最も好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例には、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基)及びアシルオキシ基(例えば、アクリロイルオキシ基、メタクリロイルオキシ基)が含まれる。 The alkyl group represented by R 2 may be a cyclic alkyl group or a chain alkyl group, but a chain alkyl group is preferable, and a linear alkyl group is more preferable than a branched chain alkyl group. preferable. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, still more preferably 1 to 8, and further preferably 1 to 6. Most preferred. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group) and an acyloxy group (for example, acryloyloxy group, methacryloyloxy group).
 Rが表すアルケニル基は、環状アルケニル基であっても鎖状アルケニル基であってもよいが、鎖状アルケニル基を表すのが好ましく、分岐を有する鎖状アルケニル基よりも、直鎖状アルケニル基を表すのがより好ましい。アルケニル基の炭素原子数は、2~30であることが好ましく、2~20であることがより好ましく、2~10であることがさらに好ましく、2~8であることがさらにまた好ましく、2~6であることが最も好ましい。アルケニル基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例には、前述のアルキル基の置換基と同様である。 The alkenyl group represented by R 2 may be a cyclic alkenyl group or a chain alkenyl group, but preferably represents a chain alkenyl group, and is a straight chain alkenyl group rather than a branched chain alkenyl group. More preferably it represents a group. The number of carbon atoms of the alkenyl group is preferably 2 to 30, more preferably 2 to 20, further preferably 2 to 10, still more preferably 2 to 8, and further preferably 2 to 6 is most preferred. The alkenyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent are the same as those of the alkyl group described above.
 Rが表す芳香族環基及び複素環基は、Rが表す芳香族環及び複素環と同様であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。芳香族環基及び複素環基はさらに置換基を有していてもよく、置換基の例にはRの芳香族環及び複素環の置換基と同様である。 The aromatic ring group and heterocyclic group represented by R 2 are the same as the aromatic ring and heterocyclic ring represented by R 1 , and the preferred range is also the same. The aromatic ring group and the heterocyclic group may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent are the same as those of the aromatic ring and heterocyclic ring of R 1 .
 以下に一般式(I)で表される化合物の具体例を挙げるが、こられに限定されない。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I) are given below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 円盤状化合物としては下記一般式(II)で表されるトリフェニレン化合物を好ましく用いることもできる。 As the discotic compound, a triphenylene compound represented by the following general formula (II) can also be preferably used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 上記一般式(II)中、R~Rは各々独立して、水素原子又は置換基を表す。 In the general formula (II), R 1 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
 R~Rが各々表す置換基としては、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基などが挙げられる)、アルケニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~40、より好ましくは炭素数2~30、特に好ましくは炭素数2~20のアルケニル基であり、例えば、ビニル基、アリル基、2-ブテニル基、3-ペンテニル基などが挙げられる)、アルキニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~40、より好ましくは炭素数2~30、特に好ましくは炭素数2~20のアルキニル基であり、例えば、プロパルギル基、3-ペンチニル基などが挙げられる)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~30、より好ましくは炭素数6~20、特に好ましくは炭素数6~12のアリール基であり、例えば、フェニル基、p-メチルフェニル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる)、置換もしくは無置換のアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~40、より好ましくは炭素数0~30、特に好ましくは炭素数0~20のアミノ基であり、例えば、無置換アミノ基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、アニリノ基などが挙げられる)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基であり、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基などが挙げられる)、アリールオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数6~40、より好ましくは炭素数6~30、特に好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリールオキシ基であり、例えば、フェニルオキシ基、2-ナフチルオキシ基などが挙げられる)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のアシル基であり、例えば、アセチル基、ベンゾイル基、ホルミル基、ピバロイル基などが挙げられる)、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~40、より好ましくは炭素数2~30、特に好ましくは炭素数2~20のアルコキシカルボニル基であり、例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基などが挙げられる)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数7~40、より好ましくは炭素数7~30、特に好ましくは炭素数7~20のアリールオキシカルボニル基であり、例えば、フェニルオキシカルボニル基などが挙げられる)、アシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~40、より好ましくは炭素数2~30、特に好ましくは炭素数2~20のアシルオキシ基であり、例えば、アセトキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基などが挙げられる)、アシルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~40、より好ましくは炭素数2~30、特に好ましくは炭素数2~20のアシルアミノ基であり、例えばアセチルアミノ基、ベンゾイルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~40、より好ましくは炭素数2~30、特に好ましくは炭素数2~20のアルコキシカルボニルアミノ基であり、例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数7~40、より好ましくは炭素数7~30、特に好ましくは炭素数7~20のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基であり、例えば、フェニルオキシカルボニルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、スルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のスルホニルアミノ基であり、例えば、メタンスルホニルアミノ基、ベンゼンスルホニルアミノ基などが挙げられる)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数0~40、より好ましくは炭素数0~30、特に好ましくは炭素数0~20のスルファモイル基であり、例えば、スルファモイル基、メチルスルファモイル基、ジメチルスルファモイル基、フェニルスルファモイル基などが挙げられる)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のカルバモイル基であり、例えば、無置換のカルバモイル基、メチルカルバモイル基、ジエチルカルバモイル基、フェニルカルバモイル基などが挙げられる)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20であり、例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、プロピルチオ基、ブチルチオ基、ペンチルチオ基、ヘキシルチオ基、ヘプチルチオ基、オクチルチオ基などが挙げられる)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは、炭素数6~40、より好ましくは炭素数6~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20、例えば、フェニルチオ基などが挙げられる)、スルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のスルホニル基であり、例えば、メシル基、トシル基などが挙げられる)、スルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のスルフィニル基であり、例えば、メタンスルフィニル基、ベンゼンスルフィニル基などが挙げられる)、ウレイド基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のウレイド基であり、例えば、無置換のウレイド基、メチルウレイド基、フェニルウレイド基などが挙げられる)、リン酸アミド基(好ましくは炭素数1~40、より好ましくは炭素数1~30、特に好ましくは炭素数1~20のリン酸アミド基であり、例えば、ジエチルリン酸アミド基、フェニルリン酸アミド基などが挙げられる)、ヒドロキシ基、メルカプト基、ハロゲン原子(例えばフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、シアノ基、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、ヘテロ環基(好ましくは炭素数1~30、より好ましくは1~12のヘテロ環基であり、例えば、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を有するヘテロ環基であり、例えば、イミダゾリル基、ピリジル基、キノリル基、フリル基、ピペリジル基、モルホリノ基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ベンズイミダゾリル基、ベンズチアゾリル基、1,3,5-トリアジル基などが挙げられる)、シリル基(好ましくは、炭素数3~40、より好ましくは炭素数3~30、特に好ましくは、炭素数3~24のシリル基であり、例えば、トリメチルシリル基、トリフェニルシリル基などが挙げられる)が含まれる。これらの置換基はさらにこれらの置換基によって置換されていてもよい。また、置換基を二つ以上有する場合は、同じでも異なってもよい。また、可能な場合には互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。 The substituent represented by each of R 1 to R 6 is an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.), alkenyl group (preferably carbon An alkenyl group having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a 2-butenyl group, and a 3-pentenyl group. An alkynyl group (preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, For example, a propargyl group, a 3-pentynyl group, etc.), an aryl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, , Phenyl group, p-methylphenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted amino group (preferably having 0 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 0 to carbon atoms). 20 amino groups, such as an unsubstituted amino group, a methylamino group, a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, and an anilino group), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 carbon atom). To 30 and particularly preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a butoxy group). A reeloxy group (preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyloxy group and a 2-naphthyloxy group. An acyl group (preferably an acyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, for example, an acetyl group, a benzoyl group, a formyl group, a pivaloyl group) An alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, etc.) Groups), aryloxycarbonyl groups (preferably having 7 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon numbers) An aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a phenyloxycarbonyl group, and an acyloxy group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 2 carbon atoms). 30, particularly preferably an acyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as an acetoxy group and a benzoyloxy group), an acylamino group (preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, Particularly preferred are acylamino groups having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, such as acetylamino group and benzoylamino group, and alkoxycarbonylamino groups (preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, Particularly preferred is an alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, for example, methoxy A sulfonylamino group), an aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably an aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms, , A phenyloxycarbonylamino group, etc.), a sulfonylamino group (preferably a sulfonylamino group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, A methanesulfonylamino group, a benzenesulfonylamino group, etc.), a sulfamoyl group (preferably a sulfamoyl group having 0 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 0 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 0 to 20 carbon atoms, , Sulfamoyl group, methylsulfamoyl group, dimethylsulfamo A carbamoyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms). An unsubstituted carbamoyl group, a methylcarbamoyl group, a diethylcarbamoyl group, a phenylcarbamoyl group, and the like), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to carbon atoms). 20, for example, methylthio group, ethylthio group, propylthio group, butylthio group, pentylthio group, hexylthio group, heptylthio group, octylthio group and the like, arylthio group (preferably having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as Fe A sulfonyl group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as mesyl group and tosyl group). A sulfinyl group (preferably a sulfinyl group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a methanesulfinyl group and a benzenesulfinyl group). Ureido groups (preferably ureido groups having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as unsubstituted ureido groups, methylureido groups, Phenylureido group, etc.), phosphoric acid amide group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, A phosphoric acid amide group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a diethylphosphoric acid amide group and a phenylphosphoric acid amide group, a hydroxy group, a mercapto group, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Bromine atom, iodine atom), cyano group, sulfo group, carboxy group, nitro group, hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, hydrazino group, imino group, heterocyclic group (preferably having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms). A heterocyclic group having a heteroatom such as a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, such as an imidazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a quinolyl group, a furyl group, a piperidyl group, a morpholino group, a benzoyl group, (Oxazolyl group, benzimidazolyl group, benzthiazolyl group, 1,3,5-triazyl group, etc.) Silyl group (preferably a silyl group having 3 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 3 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 3 to 24 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a trimethylsilyl group and a triphenylsilyl group) Is included. These substituents may be further substituted with these substituents. Moreover, when it has two or more substituents, they may be the same or different. If possible, they may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 R~Rが各々表す置換基としては、好ましくはアルキル基、アリール基、置換もしくは無置換のアミノ基、アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基又はハロゲン原子である。以下に一般式(II)で表される化合物の具体例を挙げるが、こられに限定されない。 The substituent represented by each of R 1 to R 6 is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted amino group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, or a halogen atom. Although the specific example of a compound represented by general formula (II) below is given, it is not limited to this.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 一般式(I)で表される化合物は、例えば特開2003-344655号公報に記載の方法、一般式(II)で表される化合物は、例えば特開2005-134884号公報に記載の方法等、公知の方法により合成することができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (I) is, for example, a method described in JP-A-2003-344655, and the compound represented by the general formula (II) is, for example, a method described in JP-A-2005-134484. Can be synthesized by a known method.
 本発明では前述の円盤状化合物の他に直線的な分子構造を有する棒状化合物も好ましく用いることができる。直線的な分子構造とは、熱力学的に最も安定な構造において棒状化合物の分子構造が直線的であることを意味する。熱力学的に最も安定な構造は、結晶構造解析又は分子軌道計算によって求めることができる。例えば、分子軌道計算ソフト(例えば、WinMOPAC2000、富士通(株)製)を用いて分子軌道計算を行い、化合物の生成熱が最も小さくなるような分子の構造を求めることができる。分子構造が直線的であるとは、上記のように計算して求められる熱力学的に最も安定な構造において、分子構造で主鎖の構成する角度が140度以上であることを意味する。 In the present invention, rod-like compounds having a linear molecular structure can be preferably used in addition to the above-mentioned discotic compounds. The linear molecular structure means that the molecular structure of the rod-like compound is linear in the most thermodynamically stable structure. The most thermodynamically stable structure can be obtained by crystal structure analysis or molecular orbital calculation. For example, molecular orbital calculation is performed using molecular orbital calculation software (for example, WinMOPAC2000, manufactured by Fujitsu Limited), and a molecular structure that minimizes the heat of formation of a compound can be obtained. The molecular structure being linear means that in the thermodynamically most stable structure obtained by calculation as described above, the angle of the main chain constituting the molecular structure is 140 degrees or more.
 少なくとも二つの芳香族環を有する棒状化合物としては、下記一般式(11)で表される化合物が好ましい。 The rod-shaped compound having at least two aromatic rings is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (11).
 一般式(11):Ar-L-Ar
 上記一般式(11)において、Ar及びArは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基である。
Formula (11): Ar 1 -L 1 -Ar 2
In the general formula (11), Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently an aromatic group.
 本明細書において、芳香族基は、アリール基(芳香族性炭化水素基)、置換アリール基、芳香族性ヘテロ環基及び置換芳香族性ヘテロ環基を含む。 In the present specification, the aromatic group includes an aryl group (aromatic hydrocarbon group), a substituted aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, and a substituted aromatic heterocyclic group.
 アリール基及び置換アリール基の方が、芳香族性ヘテロ環基及び置換芳香族性ヘテロ環基よりも好ましい。芳香族性ヘテロ環基のヘテロ環は、一般には不飽和である。芳香族性ヘテロ環は、5員環、6員環又は7員環であることが好ましく、5員環又は6員環であることがさらに好ましい。芳香族性ヘテロ環は一般に最多の二重結合を有する。ヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子又は硫黄原子が好ましく、窒素原子又は硫黄原子がさらに好ましい。 An aryl group and a substituted aryl group are more preferable than an aromatic heterocyclic group and a substituted aromatic heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group is generally unsaturated. The aromatic heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring, 6-membered ring or 7-membered ring, more preferably a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring. Aromatic heterocycles generally have the most double bonds. As a hetero atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is preferable, and a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable.
 芳香族基の芳香族環としては、ベンゼン環、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピロール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、ピリジン環、ピリミジン環及びピラジン環が好ましく、ベンゼン環が特に好ましい。 As the aromatic ring of the aromatic group, a benzene ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, an imidazole ring, a triazole ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring and a pyrazine ring are preferable, and a benzene ring is particularly preferable. .
 置換アリール基及び置換芳香族性ヘテロ環基の置換基の例には、ハロゲン原子(F、Cl、Br、I)、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、シアノ基、アミノ基、アルキルアミノ基(例えば、メチルアミノ基、エチルアミノ基、ブチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基の各基)、ニトロ基、スルホ基、カルバモイル基、アルキルカルバモイル基(例えば、N-メチルカルバモイル基、N-エチルカルバモイル基、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイル基の各基)、スルファモイル基、アルキルスルファモイル基(例えば、N-メチルスルファモイル基、N-エチルスルファモイル基、N,N-ジメチルスルファモイル基の各基)、ウレイド基、アルキルウレイド基(例えば、N-メチルウレイド基、N,N-ジメチルウレイド基、N,N,N′-トリメチルウレイド基の各基)、アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、イソプロピル基、s-ブチル基、tert-アミル基、シクロヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基の各基)、アルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、アリル基、ヘキセニル基の各基)、アルキニル基(例えば、エチニル基、ブチニル基)、アシル基(例えば、ホルミル基、アセチル基、ブチリル基、ヘキサノイル基、ラウリル基の各基)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセトキシ基、ブチリルオキシ基、ヘキサノイルオキシ基、ラウリルオキシ基の各基)、アルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘプチルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基の各基)、アリールオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシ基)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、プロポキシカルボニル基、ブトキシカルボニル基、ペンチルオキシカルボニル基、ヘプチルオキシカルボニル基の各基)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(例えば、フェノキシカルボニル基)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(例えば、ブトキシカルボニルアミノ基、ヘキシルオキシカルボニルアミノ基)、アルキルチオ基(例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、プロピルチオ基、ブチルチオ基、ペンチルチオ基、ヘプチルチオ基、オクチルチオ基の各基)、アリールチオ基(例えば、フェニルチオ基)、アルキルスルホニル基(例えば、メチルスルホニル基、エチルスルホニル基、プロピルスルホニル基、ブチルスルホニル基、ペンチルスルホニル基、ヘプチルスルホニル基、オクチルスルホニル基の各基)、アミド基(例えば、アセトアミド基、ブチルアミド基、ヘキシルアミド基、ラウリルアミド基の各基)及び非芳香族性複素環基(例えば、モルホリル基、ピラジニル基)が含まれる。 Examples of the substituent of the substituted aryl group and the substituted aromatic heterocyclic group include a halogen atom (F, Cl, Br, I), a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a cyano group, an amino group, an alkylamino group (for example, methyl Amino group, ethylamino group, butylamino group, dimethylamino group), nitro group, sulfo group, carbamoyl group, alkylcarbamoyl group (for example, N-methylcarbamoyl group, N-ethylcarbamoyl group, N, N-) Dimethylcarbamoyl group), sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group (eg, N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl group), ureido Group, alkylureido group (for example, N-methylureido group, N, N-dimethylureido group, N, N, N′-trimethyl) Each group of ureido group), alkyl group (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, isopropyl group, s-butyl group, tert-amyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclopentyl) Group), alkenyl group (for example, vinyl group, allyl group, hexenyl group), alkynyl group (for example, ethynyl group, butynyl group), acyl group (for example, formyl group, acetyl group, butyryl group, Hexanoyl group, lauryl group), acyloxy group (for example, acetoxy group, butyryloxy group, hexanoyloxy group, lauryloxy group), alkoxy group (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group) Pentyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group), aryloxy Group (for example, phenoxy group), alkoxycarbonyl group (for example, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, propoxycarbonyl group, butoxycarbonyl group, pentyloxycarbonyl group, heptyloxycarbonyl group), aryloxycarbonyl group (for example, , Phenoxycarbonyl group), alkoxycarbonylamino group (for example, butoxycarbonylamino group, hexyloxycarbonylamino group), alkylthio group (for example, methylthio group, ethylthio group, propylthio group, butylthio group, pentylthio group, heptylthio group, octylthio group) Each group), arylthio group (for example, phenylthio group), alkylsulfonyl group (for example, methylsulfonyl group, ethylsulfonyl group, propylsulfonyl group, butylsulfonyl) Group, pentylsulfonyl group, heptylsulfonyl group, octylsulfonyl group), amide group (for example, acetamido group, butyramide group, hexylamide group, laurylamide group) and non-aromatic heterocyclic group (for example, , Morpholyl group, and pyrazinyl group).
 なかでも、好ましい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、アルキルアミノ基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アミド基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基及びアルキル基が挙げられる。 Among these, preferable substituents include halogen atoms, cyano groups, carboxy groups, hydroxy groups, amino groups, alkylamino groups, acyl groups, acyloxy groups, amide groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, alkoxy groups, alkylthio groups, and alkyl groups. Can be mentioned.
 アルキルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルコキシ基及びアルキルチオ基のアルキル部分とアルキル基とは、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。アルキル部分及びアルキル基の置換基の例には、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、シアノ基、アミノ基、アルキルアミノ基、ニトロ基、スルホ基、カルバモイル基、アルキルカルバモイル基、スルファモイル基、アルキルスルファモイル基、ウレイド基、アルキルウレイド基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アミド基及び非芳香族性複素環基が含まれる。アルキル部分及びアルキル基の置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、アルキルアミノ基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アシルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニル基及びアルコキシ基が好ましい。 The alkyl moiety of the alkylamino group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkoxy group, and alkylthio group and the alkyl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the alkyl moiety and the substituent of the alkyl group include a halogen atom, hydroxy group, carboxy group, cyano group, amino group, alkylamino group, nitro group, sulfo group, carbamoyl group, alkylcarbamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfur group. Famoyl group, ureido group, alkylureido group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, acyl group, acyloxy group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, An alkylsulfonyl group, an amide group and a non-aromatic heterocyclic group are included. As the substituent for the alkyl moiety and the alkyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, and an alkoxy group are preferable.
 一般式(11)において、L1は、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、-O-、-CO-及びそれらの組み合わせからなる基から選ばれる二価の連結基である。 In the general formula (11), L1 is a divalent linking group selected from an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, —O—, —CO— and a combination thereof.
 アルキレン基は、環状構造を有していてもよい。環状アルキレン基としては、シクロヘキシレンが好ましく、1,4-シクロヘキシレンが特に好ましい。鎖状アルキレン基としては、直鎖状アルキレン基の方が分岐を有するアルキレン基よりも好ましい。 The alkylene group may have a cyclic structure. As the cyclic alkylene group, cyclohexylene is preferable, and 1,4-cyclohexylene is particularly preferable. As the chain alkylene group, a linear alkylene group is more preferable than a branched alkylene group.
 アルキレン基の炭素原子数は、1~20であることが好ましく、より好ましくは1~15であり、さらに好ましくは1~10であり、さらに好ましくは1~8であり、最も好ましくは1~6である。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-15, still more preferably 1-10, still more preferably 1-8, and most preferably 1-6. It is.
 アルケニレン基及びアルキニレン基は、環状構造よりも鎖状構造を有することが好ましく、分岐を有する鎖状構造よりも直鎖状構造を有することがさらに好ましい。 The alkenylene group and the alkynylene group preferably have a chain structure rather than a cyclic structure, and more preferably have a linear structure rather than a branched chain structure.
 アルケニレン基及びアルキニレン基の炭素原子数は、好ましくは2~10であり、より好ましくは2~8であり、さらに好ましくは2~6であり、さらに好ましくは2~4であり、最も好ましくは2(ビニレン基又はエチニレン基)である。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkenylene group and the alkynylene group is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 8, further preferably 2 to 6, further preferably 2 to 4, and most preferably 2. (Vinylene group or ethynylene group).
 アリーレン基は、炭素原子数は6~20であることが好ましく、より好ましくは6~16であり、さらに好ましくは6~12である。 The arylene group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 16, and still more preferably 6 to 12.
 一般式(11)の分子構造において、Lを挟んで、ArとArとが形成する角度は、140度以上であることが好ましい。 In the molecular structure of the general formula (11), the angle formed by Ar 1 and Ar 2 across L 1 is preferably 140 degrees or more.
 棒状化合物としては、下記式一般式(12)で表される化合物がさらに好ましい。 As the rod-like compound, a compound represented by the following formula (12) is more preferable.
 一般式(12):Ar-L-X-L-Ar
 上記一般式(12)において、Ar及びArは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基である。芳香族基の定義及び例は、一般式(12)のAr及びArと同様である。
Formula (12): Ar 1 -L 2 -XL 3 -Ar 2
In the general formula (12), Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently an aromatic group. The definition and examples of the aromatic group are the same as those of Ar 1 and Ar 2 in the general formula (12).
 一般式(12)において、L及びLは、それぞれ独立に、アルキレン基、-O-、-CO-及びそれらの組み合わせからなる基より選ばれる二価の連結基である。 In the general formula (12), L 2 and L 3 are each independently a divalent linking group selected from an alkylene group, —O—, —CO— and a group consisting of a combination thereof.
 アルキレン基は、環状構造よりも鎖状構造を有することが好ましく、分岐を有する鎖状構造よりも直鎖状構造を有することがさらに好ましい。 The alkylene group preferably has a chain structure rather than a cyclic structure, and more preferably has a linear structure rather than a branched chain structure.
 アルキレン基の炭素原子数は、1~10であることが好ましく、より好ましくは1~8であり、さらに好ましくは1~6であり、さらに好ましくは1~4であり、1又は2(メチレン基又はエチレン基)であることが最も好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 8, still more preferably 1 to 6, further preferably 1 to 4, and 1 or 2 (methylene group). Or an ethylene group) is most preferable.
 L及びLは、-O-CO-又はCO-O-であることが特に好ましい。 L 2 and L 3 are particularly preferably —O—CO— or CO—O—.
 一般式(12)において、Xは、1,4-シクロヘキシレン基、ビニレン基又はエチニレン基である。 In the general formula (12), X represents a 1,4-cyclohexylene group, a vinylene group or an ethynylene group.
 一般式(11)又は(12)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特開2004-109657号公報の〔化1〕~〔化11〕に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (11) or (12) include compounds described in [Chemical Formula 1] to [Chemical Formula 11] of JP-A No. 2004-109657.
 溶液の紫外線吸収スペクトルにおいて最大吸収波長(λmax)が250nmより長波長である棒状化合物を、二種類以上併用してもよい。 Two or more rod-like compounds having a maximum absorption wavelength (λmax) longer than 250 nm in the ultraviolet absorption spectrum of the solution may be used in combination.
 棒状化合物は、文献記載の方法を参照して合成できる。文献としては、Mol.Cryst.Liq.Cryst.,53巻、229ページ(1979年)、同89巻、93ページ(1982年)、同145巻、111ページ(1987年)、同170巻、43ページ(1989年)、J.Am.Chem.Soc.,113巻、1349ページ(1991年)、同118巻、5346ページ(1996年)、同92巻、1582ページ(1970年)、J.Org.Chem.,40巻、420ページ(1975年)、Tetrahedron、48巻16号、3437ページ(1992年)を挙げることができる。 The rod-like compound can be synthesized with reference to the methods described in the literature. As literature, Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 53, 229 (1979), 89, 93 (1982), 145, 111 (1987), 170, 43 (1989), J. Am. Am. Chem. Soc. 113, p. 1349 (1991), p. 118, p. 5346 (1996), p. 92, p. 1582 (1970). Org. Chem. 40, 420 pages (1975), Tetrahedron, Vol. 48, No. 16, page 3437 (1992).
 また、特開2004-50516号公報の11~14頁に記載の棒状芳香族化合物を、前記Ro発現剤として用いてもよい。 Also, the rod-like aromatic compounds described on pages 11 to 14 of JP-A-2004-50516 may be used as the Ro enhancer.
 また、リターデーション発現剤として、一種の化合物を単独で、又は二種類以上の化合物を混合して用いることができる。リターデーション発現剤として互いに異なる二種類以上の化合物を用いると、リターデーションの調整範囲が広がり、容易に所望の範囲に調整できるので好ましい。 Further, as the retardation developer, one kind of compound can be used alone, or two or more kinds of compounds can be mixed and used. It is preferable to use two or more different compounds as the retardation enhancer because the retardation adjustment range is widened and can be easily adjusted to a desired range.
 前記リターデーション発現剤の添加量はセルロースアシレート100質量部に対して、0.1~20質量%が好ましく、0.5~10質量%がさらに好ましい。前記セルロースアシレートフィルムをソルベントキャスト法で作製する場合は、前記リターデーション発現剤を、ドープ中に添加してもよい。添加はいずれのタイミングで行ってもよく、例えば、アルコール、メチレンクロライド、ジオキソラン等の有機溶媒にリターデーション発現剤を溶解してから、セルロースアシレート溶液(ドープ)に添加してもよいし、又は直接ドープ組成中に添加してもよい。 The amount of addition of the retardation developer is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of cellulose acylate. When the cellulose acylate film is produced by a solvent cast method, the retardation developer may be added to the dope. The addition may be performed at any timing, for example, the retardation developer may be dissolved in an organic solvent such as alcohol, methylene chloride, dioxolane, and then added to the cellulose acylate solution (dope), or You may add directly in dope composition.
 特に、前記円盤状化合物の割合が、円盤状化合物と棒状化合物の総質量に対して0.1~20%であることが好ましく、0.5~15%であることがより好ましく、1~10%であることが特に好ましい。 In particular, the ratio of the discotic compound is preferably 0.1 to 20%, more preferably 0.5 to 15%, more preferably 1 to 10 based on the total mass of the discotic compound and the rod-shaped compound. % Is particularly preferred.
 その他、前記各公報に記載されている以外の棒状化合物の好ましい化合物の具体例を以下に示す。 Other specific examples of preferable rod-like compounds other than those described in the above-mentioned publications are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 前記具体例(1)~(34)、(41)、(42)は、シクロヘキサン環の1位と4位とに二つの不斉炭素原子を有する。ただし、具体例(1)、(4)~(34)、(41)、(42)は、対称なメソ型の分子構造を有するため光学異性体(光学活性)はなく、幾何異性体(トランス型とシス型)のみ存在する。具体例(1)のトランス型(1-trans)とシス型(1-cis)とを、以下に示す。 Specific examples (1) to (34), (41), and (42) have two asymmetric carbon atoms at the 1-position and the 4-position of the cyclohexane ring. However, since the specific examples (1), (4) to (34), (41), (42) have a symmetrical meso type molecular structure, there are no optical isomers (optical activity), and geometric isomers (trans Type and cis type). The trans type (1-trans) and cis type (1-cis) of specific example (1) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 前述したように、棒状化合物は直線的な分子構造を有することが好ましい。そのため、トランス型の方がシス型よりも好ましい。 As described above, the rod-like compound preferably has a linear molecular structure. Therefore, the trans type is preferable to the cis type.
 具体例(2)及び(3)は、幾何異性体に加えて光学異性体(合計4種の異性体)を有する。幾何異性体については、同様にトランス型の方がシス型よりも好ましい。光学異性体については、特に優劣はなく、D、Lあるいはラセミ体のいずれでもよい。 Specific examples (2) and (3) have optical isomers (a total of four isomers) in addition to geometric isomers. As for geometric isomers, the trans type is similarly preferable to the cis type. The optical isomer is not particularly superior or inferior, and may be D, L, or a racemate.
 具体例(43)~(45)では、中心のビニレン結合にトランス型とシス型とがある。上記と同様の理由で、トランス型の方がシス型よりも好ましい。 In specific examples (43) to (45), the central vinylene bond includes a trans type and a cis type. For the same reason as above, the trans type is preferable to the cis type.
 本発明に係るリターデーション発現剤としては、前記低分子化合物と同様に、高分子系添加剤を使用することもできる。高分子添加剤としては、ポリエステル系ポリマー、スチレン系ポリマー及びアクリル系ポリマー及びこれら等の共重合体から選択されるが、芳香族ポリエステルが好ましい。 As the retardation developer according to the present invention, a polymer additive can be used as in the case of the low molecular weight compound. The polymer additive is selected from polyester polymers, styrene polymers, acrylic polymers, and copolymers thereof, and aromatic polyesters are preferred.
 本発明で用いられる芳香族ポリエステル系ポリマーは、前記ポリエステルポリマーに芳香環を有するモノマーを共重合することによって得られる。芳香環を有するモノマーとしては、炭素数8~20の芳香族ジカルボン酸、炭素数6~20の芳香族ジオールから選ばれる少なくとも一種類以上のモノマーである。 The aromatic polyester polymer used in the present invention is obtained by copolymerizing a monomer having an aromatic ring with the polyester polymer. The monomer having an aromatic ring is at least one monomer selected from aromatic dicarboxylic acids having 8 to 20 carbon atoms and aromatic diols having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
 炭素数8~20の芳香族ジカルボン酸としては、フタル酸、テレフタル酸、イソフタル酸、1,5-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,4-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,8-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、2,8-ナフタレンジカルボン酸及び2,6-ナフタレンジカルボン酸等がある。これらの中でも好ましい芳香族ジカルボン酸としてはフタル酸、テレフタル酸、イソフタル酸、である。 Examples of the aromatic dicarboxylic acid having 8 to 20 carbon atoms include phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,8-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,8- There are naphthalenedicarboxylic acid and 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid. Among these, preferable aromatic dicarboxylic acids are phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and isophthalic acid.
 炭素数6~20の芳香族ジオールとしては、特に限定されないがビスフェノールA、1,2-ヒドロキシベンゼン、1,3-ヒドロキシベンゼン、1,4-ヒドロキシベンゼン、1,4-ベンゼンジメタノールが挙げられ、好ましくはビスフェノールA、1,4-ヒドロキシベンゼン、1,4-ベンゼンジメタノールである。 Examples of the aromatic diol having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include, but are not limited to, bisphenol A, 1,2-hydroxybenzene, 1,3-hydroxybenzene, 1,4-hydroxybenzene, and 1,4-benzenedimethanol. Of these, bisphenol A, 1,4-hydroxybenzene, and 1,4-benzenedimethanol are preferred.
 本発明では、前述のポリエステルに芳香族ジカルボン酸又は芳香族ジオールのそれぞれの少なくとも一種類を組み合わせて用いられるが、その組み合わせは特に限定されるものではなく、それぞれの成分を数種類組み合わせても問題ない。本発明においては、前述のように、特に末端がアルキル基あるいは芳香族基で封止された高分子量添加剤であることが好ましく、封止には前述の方法を使用することができる。 In the present invention, the aforementioned polyester is used in combination with at least one of aromatic dicarboxylic acid or aromatic diol, but the combination is not particularly limited, and there is no problem even if several kinds of each component are combined. . In the present invention, as described above, a high molecular weight additive whose end is sealed with an alkyl group or an aromatic group is particularly preferable, and the above-described method can be used for sealing.
 本発明で使用されるポリエステル系ポリマーを、以下に記載するが本発明はこれらに限定されない。 The polyester polymer used in the present invention is described below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
 本発明に係るリターデーション発現剤としては、前記リターデーション発現剤のうち、例えば、円盤状化合物及び棒状化合物などを挙げることができ、その中でも複数の芳香環を有するトリアジン系化合物及び棒状化合物(1)~(7)が好ましい。 Examples of the retardation developing agent according to the present invention include, for example, a discotic compound and a rod-like compound among the retardation developing agents, among which triazine compounds and rod-like compounds having a plurality of aromatic rings (1 ) To (7) are preferred.
 (その他の添加剤)
 本発明では、必要に応じ、可塑剤、劣化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、剥離促進剤、マット剤、滑剤、前述の可塑剤等を適宜用いることができる。
(Other additives)
In the present invention, a plasticizer, a deterioration inhibitor, an ultraviolet absorber, a peeling accelerator, a matting agent, a lubricant, the above-described plasticizer, and the like can be appropriately used as necessary.
 (可塑剤)
 可塑剤としては、リン酸エステル又はカルボン酸エステルが用いられる。リン酸エステルの例には、トリフェニルホスフェート(TPP)及びトリクレジルホスフェート(TCP)が含まれる。カルボン酸エステルとしては、フタル酸エステル及びクエン酸エステルが代表的である。フタル酸エステルの例には、ジメチルフタレート(DMP)、ジエチルフタレート(DEP)、ジブチルフタレート(DBP)、ジオクチルフタレート(DOP)、ジフェニルフタレート(DPP)及びジエチルヘキシルフタレート(DEHP)が含まれる。クエン酸エステルの例には、O-アセチルクエン酸トリエチル(OACTE)及びO-アセチルクエン酸トリブチル(OACTB)が含まれる。その他のカルボン酸エステルの例には、オレイン酸ブチル、リシノール酸メチルアセチル、セバシン酸ジブチル、種々のトリメリット酸エステルが含まれる。フタル酸エステル系可塑剤(DMP、DEP、DBP、DOP、DPP、DEHP)が好ましく用いられる。DEP及びDPPが特に好ましい。可塑剤の添加量は、セルロース系樹脂の質量の0.1~25質量%であることが好ましく、1~20質量%であることがさらに好ましく、3~15質量%であることが最も好ましい。
(Plasticizer)
As the plasticizer, phosphoric acid ester or carboxylic acid ester is used. Examples of phosphate esters include triphenyl phosphate (TPP) and tricresyl phosphate (TCP). Representative examples of the carboxylic acid ester include phthalic acid esters and citric acid esters. Examples of phthalic acid esters include dimethyl phthalate (DMP), diethyl phthalate (DEP), dibutyl phthalate (DBP), dioctyl phthalate (DOP), diphenyl phthalate (DPP) and diethyl hexyl phthalate (DEHP). Examples of citrate esters include triethyl O-acetylcitrate (OACTE) and tributyl O-acetylcitrate (OACTB). Examples of other carboxylic acid esters include butyl oleate, methylacetyl ricinoleate, dibutyl sebacate, and various trimellitic acid esters. Phthalate plasticizers (DMP, DEP, DBP, DOP, DPP, DEHP) are preferably used. DEP and DPP are particularly preferred. The addition amount of the plasticizer is preferably from 0.1 to 25% by mass, more preferably from 1 to 20% by mass, and most preferably from 3 to 15% by mass based on the mass of the cellulosic resin.
 (劣化防止剤)
 本発明においてはセルロースエステル溶液に公知の劣化(酸化)防止剤、例えば、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール、4,4′-チオビス-(6-tert-ブチル-3-メチルフェノール)、1,1′-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)シクロヘキサン、2,2′-メチレンビス(4-エチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,5-ジ-tert-ブチルヒドロキノン、ペンタエリスリチル-テトラキス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート]などのフェノール系あるいはヒドロキノン系酸化防止剤を添加することができる。さらに、トリス(4-メトキシ-3,5-ジフェニル)ホスファイト、トリス(ノニルフェニル)ホスファイト、トリス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル)ホスファイト、ビス(2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェニル)ペンタエリスリトールジホスファイト、ビス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル)ペンタエリスリトールジホスファイトなどのリン系酸化防止剤をすることが好ましい。劣化防止剤の添加量は、セルロース系樹脂100質量部に対して、0.05~5.0質量部を添加する。
(Deterioration inhibitor)
In the present invention, a known deterioration (oxidation) inhibitor such as 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 4,4′-thiobis- (6-tert-butyl-3-) is added to the cellulose ester solution. Methylphenol), 1,1'-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) cyclohexane, 2,2'-methylenebis (4-ethyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone, pentaerythrityl A phenolic or hydroquinone antioxidant such as tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] can be added. Further, tris (4-methoxy-3,5-diphenyl) phosphite, tris (nonylphenyl) phosphite, tris (2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl) phosphite, bis (2,6-di-tert) Phosphorus antioxidants such as -butyl-4-methylphenyl) pentaerythritol diphosphite and bis (2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl) pentaerythritol diphosphite are preferably used. The deterioration inhibitor is added in an amount of 0.05 to 5.0 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose resin.
 (紫外線吸収剤)
 本発明においてはセルロースエステル溶液に、偏光板又は液晶等の劣化防止の観点から、紫外線吸収剤が好ましく用いられる。紫外線吸収剤としては、波長370nm以下の紫外線の吸収能に優れ、かつ良好な液晶表示性の観点から、波長400nm以上の可視光の吸収が少ないものが好ましく用いられる。本発明に好ましく用いられる紫外線吸収剤の具体例としては、例えばヒンダードフェノール系化合物、ヒドロキシベンゾフェノン系化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物、サリチル酸エステル系化合物、ベンゾフェノン系化合物、シアノアクリレート系化合物、ニッケル錯塩系化合物などが挙げられる。ヒンダードフェノール系化合物の例としては、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ペンタエリスリチル-テトラキス〔3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、N,N′-ヘキサメチレンビス(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-ヒドロシンナミド)、1,3,5-トリメチル-2,4,6-トリス(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)ベンゼン、トリス-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)-イソシアヌレイトなどが挙げられる。ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物の例としては、2-(2′-ヒドロキシ-5′-メチルフェニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、2,2-メチレンビス(4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)-6-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)フェノール)、(2,4-ビス-(n-オクチルチオ)-6-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-tert-ブチルアニリノ)-1,3,5-トリアジン、トリエチレングリコール-ビス〔3-(3-tert-ブチル-5-メチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、N,N′-ヘキサメチレンビス(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-ヒドロシンナミド)、1,3,5-トリメチル-2,4,6-トリス(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)ベンゼン、2-(2′-ヒドロキシ-3′,5′-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル)-5-クロルベンゾトリアゾール、(2-(2′-ヒドロキシ-3′,5′-ジ-tert-アミルフェニル)-5-クロルベンゾトリアゾール、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ペンタエリスリチル-テトラキス〔3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕などが挙げられる。これらの紫外線防止剤の添加量は、セルロースエステルフィルム全体中に質量割合で1ppm~1.0%が好ましく、10~1000ppmがさらに好ましい。
(UV absorber)
In the present invention, an ultraviolet absorber is preferably used for the cellulose ester solution from the viewpoint of preventing deterioration of a polarizing plate or liquid crystal. As the ultraviolet absorber, those excellent in the ability to absorb ultraviolet rays having a wavelength of 370 nm or less and having little absorption of visible light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more are preferably used from the viewpoint of good liquid crystal display properties. Specific examples of ultraviolet absorbers preferably used in the present invention include, for example, hindered phenol compounds, hydroxybenzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, salicylic acid ester compounds, benzophenone compounds, cyanoacrylate compounds, nickel complex compounds Etc. Examples of hindered phenol compounds include 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate]. N, N'-hexamethylenebis (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamide), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tris (3,5-di-tert) -Butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) benzene, tris- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) -isocyanurate and the like. Examples of benzotriazole compounds include 2- (2′-hydroxy-5′-methylphenyl) benzotriazole, 2,2-methylenebis (4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) -6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) phenol), (2,4-bis- (n-octylthio) -6- (4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylanilino) -1,3,5- Triazine, triethylene glycol-bis [3- (3-tert-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate], N, N′-hexamethylenebis (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- Hydroxy-hydrocinnamide), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tris (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) benzene 2- (2'-hydroxy-3 ', 5'-di-tert-butylphenyl) -5-chlorobenzotriazole, (2- (2'-hydroxy-3', 5'-di-tert-amylphenyl) -5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] The addition amount of these ultraviolet light inhibitors is preferably 1 ppm to 1.0%, more preferably 10 to 1000 ppm by weight in the whole cellulose ester film.
 (剥離促進剤)
 本発明のフィルムには、剥離促進剤を含有することが、より剥離性と高める観点から好ましい。剥離促進剤は、例えば、0.001~1質量%の割合で含めることができ、0.5質量%以下の添加であれば剥離剤のフィルムからの分離等が発生し難いため好ましく、0.005質量%以上であれば所望の剥離低減効果を得ることができるため好ましいため、0.005~0.5質量%の割合で含めることが好ましく、0.01~0.3質量%の割合で含めることがより好ましい。剥離促進剤としては、公知のものが採用でき、有機、無機の酸性化合物、界面活性剤、キレート剤等を使用することができる。中でも、多価カルボン酸及びそのエステルが効果的であり、特に、クエン酸のエチルエステル類が効果的に使用することができる。
(Peeling accelerator)
It is preferable that the film of the present invention contains a release accelerator from the viewpoint of more releasability. The release accelerator can be included, for example, in a proportion of 0.001 to 1% by mass, and the addition of 0.5% by mass or less is preferable because separation of the release agent from the film hardly occurs. 005% by mass or more is preferable because a desired peeling reduction effect can be obtained. Therefore, it is preferably included at a rate of 0.005 to 0.5% by mass, and at a rate of 0.01 to 0.3% by mass. More preferably. As the peeling accelerator, known ones can be adopted, and organic and inorganic acidic compounds, surfactants, chelating agents and the like can be used. Among them, polyvalent carboxylic acids and esters thereof are effective, and in particular, ethyl esters of citric acid can be used effectively.
 本発明のフィルムには、前記スキンB層に剥離促進剤を含有することが好ましい。 The film of the present invention preferably contains a peeling accelerator in the skin B layer.
 (マット剤)
 特に本発明のフィルムには、ハンドリングされる際に、傷が付いたり搬送性が悪化することを防止するために、微粒子を添加することが一般に行われる。それらは、マット剤、ブロッキング防止剤あるいはキシミ防止剤と称されて、従来から利用されている。それらは、前述の機能を呈する素材であれば特に限定されず、無機化合物のマット剤であっても、有機化合物のマット剤であってもよい。
(Matting agent)
In particular, the film of the present invention is generally added with fine particles in order to prevent the film from being scratched or deteriorated in transportability. They are called matting agents, anti-blocking agents or anti-scratching agents and have been used conventionally. They are not particularly limited as long as they have the above-described functions, and may be an inorganic compound matting agent or an organic compound matting agent.
 前記無機化合物のマット剤の好ましい具体例としては、ケイ素を含む無機化合物(例えば、二酸化ケイ素、焼成ケイ酸カルシウム、水和ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸アルミニウム、ケイ酸マグネシウムなど)、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化アルミニウム、酸化バリウム、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化ストロングチウム、酸化アンチモン、酸化スズ、酸化スズ・アンチモン、炭酸カルシウム、タルク、クレイ、焼成カオリン及びリン酸カルシウム等が好ましく、更に好ましくはケイ素を含む無機化合物や酸化ジルコニウムであるが、セルロースエステルフィルムの濁度を低減できるので、二酸化ケイ素が特に好ましく用いられる。前記二酸化ケイ素の微粒子としては、例えば、アエロジルR972、R974、R812、200、300、R202、OX50、TT600(以上日本アエロジル(株)製)等の商品名を有する市販品が使用できる。前記酸化ジルコニウムの微粒子としては、例えば、アエロジルR976及びR811(以上日本アエロジル(株)製)等の商品名で市販されているものが使用できる。 Specific examples of the inorganic compound matting agent include silicon-containing inorganic compounds (for example, silicon dioxide, calcined calcium silicate, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate, etc.), titanium oxide, and zinc oxide. , Aluminum oxide, barium oxide, zirconium oxide, strongtium oxide, antimony oxide, tin oxide, tin oxide / antimony, calcium carbonate, talc, clay, calcined kaolin, calcium phosphate, etc., more preferably silicon-containing inorganic compounds and oxides Although it is zirconium, since the turbidity of the cellulose ester film can be reduced, silicon dioxide is particularly preferably used. As the silicon dioxide fine particles, for example, commercially available products having trade names such as Aerosil R972, R974, R812, 200, 300, R202, OX50, TT600 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) can be used. As the zirconium oxide fine particles, for example, those commercially available under trade names such as Aerosil R976 and R811 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) can be used.
 前記有機化合物のマット剤の好ましい具体例としては、例えば、シリコーン樹脂、弗素樹脂及びアクリル樹脂等のポリマーが好ましく、中でも、シリコーン樹脂が好ましく用いられる。シリコーン樹脂の中でも、特に三次元の網状構造を有するものが好ましく、例えば、トスパール103、トスパール105、トスパール108、トスパール120、トスパール145、トスパール3120及びトスパール240(以上東芝シリコーン(株)製)等の商品名を有する市販品が使用できる。 Preferred examples of the organic compound matting agent include, for example, polymers such as silicone resin, fluorine resin, and acrylic resin, and among them, silicone resin is preferably used. Among the silicone resins, those having a three-dimensional network structure are particularly preferable. For example, Tospearl 103, Tospearl 105, Tospearl 108, Tospearl 120, Tospearl 145, Tospearl 3120 and Tospearl 240 (manufactured by Toshiba Silicone Co., Ltd.) A commercial product having a trade name can be used.
 これらのマット剤をセルロースエステル溶液へ添加する場合は、特にその方法に限定されずいずれの方法でも所望のセルロースエステル溶液を得ることができれば問題ない。例えば、セルロースエステルと溶媒を混合する段階で添加物を含有させてもよいし、セルロースエステルと溶媒で混合溶液を作製した後に、添加物を添加してもよい。更にはドープを流延する直前に添加混合してもよく、所謂直前添加方法でありその混合はスクリュー式混練をオンラインで設置して用いられる。具体的には、インラインミキサーのような静的混合機が好ましい。 When these matting agents are added to the cellulose ester solution, the method is not particularly limited, and there is no problem as long as a desired cellulose ester solution can be obtained by any method. For example, an additive may be included at the stage of mixing the cellulose ester and the solvent, or the additive may be added after preparing a mixed solution with the cellulose ester and the solvent. Further, it may be added and mixed immediately before casting the dope, which is a so-called immediately preceding addition method, and the mixing is used by installing screw-type kneading online. Specifically, a static mixer such as an inline mixer is preferable.
 本発明のフィルムは、前記スキンA層及び前記スキンB層の少なくとも一方にマット剤を含有することが、フィルム面の摩擦係数低減による耐擦傷性、幅広幅フィルムを長尺で巻いたときに発生するキシミの防止、フィルム折れの防止の観点から好ましく、前記スキンA層及び前記スキンB層の両方にマット剤を含有することが耐擦傷性、キシミを効果的に低減する観点から特に好ましい。 The film of the present invention contains a matting agent in at least one of the skin A layer and the skin B layer, and is generated when a wide film is wound long by reducing the friction coefficient of the film surface. It is preferable from the viewpoint of prevention of creaking and prevention of film breakage, and it is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of effectively reducing scratch resistance and blemishes that both the skin A layer and the skin B layer contain a matting agent.
 本発明のフィルムにおいて、前記マット剤は、多量に添加しなければフィルムのヘイズが大きくならず、実際にLCDに使用した場合、コントラストの低下、輝点の発生等の不都合が生じにくい。また、少なすぎなければ上記のキシミ、耐擦傷性を実現することができる。これらの観点から0.01~5.0質量%の割合で含めることが好ましく、0.03~3.0質量%の割合で含めることがより好ましく、0.05~1.0質量%の割合で含めることが特に好ましい。 In the film of the present invention, when the matting agent is not added in a large amount, the haze of the film does not increase, and when actually used in an LCD, inconveniences such as a decrease in contrast and generation of bright spots are unlikely to occur. If the amount is too small, the above-mentioned creaking and scratch resistance can be realized. From these viewpoints, it is preferably included in a proportion of 0.01 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably included in a proportion of 0.03 to 3.0% by mass, and a proportion of 0.05 to 1.0% by mass. It is particularly preferable to include
 (ヘイズ)
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムは、ヘイズが1%未満であることが好ましく、0.5%未満であることがより好ましい。ヘイズを1%未満とすることにより、フィルムの透明性がより高くなり、セルロースエステルフィルムとしてより用いやすくなるという利点がある。
(Haze)
The cellulose ester film of the present invention preferably has a haze of less than 1%, more preferably less than 0.5%. By setting the haze to less than 1%, there is an advantage that the transparency of the film becomes higher and it becomes easier to use as a cellulose ester film.
 (膜厚)
 本発明のフィルムは、フィルム単体の膜厚が20~50μmが好ましく、積層時の前記コア層の平均膜厚が20~50μmであることが好ましく、20~45μmであることがより好ましく、30~45μmであることがさらに好ましい。20μm以上とすることにより、ウェブ状のフィルムを作製する際のハンドリング性が向上し好ましい。また、50μm以下とすることにより、湿度変化に対応しやすく、光学特性を維持しやすい。
(Film thickness)
In the film of the present invention, the film thickness of the single film is preferably 20 to 50 μm, the average film thickness of the core layer at the time of lamination is preferably 20 to 50 μm, more preferably 20 to 45 μm, and more preferably 30 to More preferably, it is 45 μm. By setting it to 20 μm or more, the handling property when producing a web-like film is improved, which is preferable. Moreover, by setting it as 50 micrometers or less, it is easy to respond to a humidity change and it is easy to maintain an optical characteristic.
 本発明のフィルムは、前記スキンA層又は前記スキンB層の少なくとも一方の平均膜厚が前記コア層平均膜厚の0.2%以上25%未満であることが、0.2%以上であれば剥離性が十分となり、スジ状のムラ、フィルムの膜厚不均一あるいは光学特性不均一が抑制され、25%未満であればコア層の光学発現性を有効に利用することができ、積層フィルムが十分な光学特性を得ることができる観点から好ましく、0.5~15%であることがより好ましく、1.0~10%であることが特に好ましい。また、前記スキンA層及び前記スキンB層の平均膜厚がともに前記コア層平均膜厚の0.2%以上25%未満であることが、より好ましい。 The film of the present invention may have an average film thickness of at least one of the skin A layer or the skin B layer of 0.2% or more and less than 25% of the average film thickness of the core layer. If it is less than 25%, the optical performance of the core layer can be effectively utilized, and the laminate film can be effectively used. Is preferable from the viewpoint of obtaining sufficient optical characteristics, more preferably 0.5 to 15%, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 10%. Moreover, it is more preferable that the average film thickness of the skin A layer and the skin B layer are both 0.2% or more and less than 25% of the average core layer film thickness.
 (フィルムの長さと幅)
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムは、当該フィルムの長さが、5000~10000mの範囲内であり、当該フィルムの幅が1.9~2.5mの範囲内であることが好ましい。
(Film length and width)
In the cellulose ester film of the present invention, the length of the film is preferably in the range of 5000 to 10,000 m, and the width of the film is preferably in the range of 1.9 to 2.5 m.
 [セルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法]
 本発明のフィルムの製造方法は、ポリマーを有機溶剤に溶解させてドープを調製する工程(ドープ調製工程)と、前記ドープを濾過する工程(濾過工程)と、ドープを支持体上に流延しする工程(流延工程)、得られたフィルムを乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)と、得られたフィルム延伸する工程(延伸工程)を少なくとも含み、その他必要に応じた工程を含むものである。
[Method for producing cellulose ester film]
The film production method of the present invention comprises a step of dissolving a polymer in an organic solvent to prepare a dope (dope preparation step), a step of filtering the dope (filtration step), and casting the dope on a support. A process (casting process), a process of drying the obtained film (drying process), a process of stretching the obtained film (stretching process), and other processes as necessary.
 また本発明のセルロースエステル積層フィルムの製造方法は、前記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するドープと、前記式(1)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するドープとを、この順に支持体上に同時又は逐次で多層流延する工程と、該多層流延したドープを乾燥させて支持体から剥離する工程と、剥離後のフィルムを延伸する工程とを含むことを特徴とする。 Moreover, the manufacturing method of the cellulose-ester laminated film of this invention is a dope containing the cellulose ester which satisfy | fills said Formula (2), and the dope containing the cellulose ester which satisfy | fills said Formula (1) on a support body in this order. The method includes a step of performing multilayer casting simultaneously or sequentially, a step of drying the multilayer cast dope and peeling it from the support, and a step of stretching the peeled film.
 (ドープ調製工程)
 詳しくは、本発明に係る製造方法では、ソルベントキャスト法によりセルロースエステルを有機溶媒に溶解した溶液(ドープ)を用いて本発明のフィルムを製造する。
(Dope preparation process)
Specifically, in the production method according to the present invention, the film of the present invention is produced using a solution (dope) obtained by dissolving a cellulose ester in an organic solvent by a solvent cast method.
 前記有機溶媒は、炭素原子数が3~12のエーテル、炭素原子数が3~12のケトン、炭素原子数が3~12のエステル及び炭素原子数が1~6のハロゲン化炭化水素から選ばれる溶媒を含むことが好ましい。エーテル、ケトン及びエステルは、環状構造を有していてもよい。エーテル、ケトン及びエステルの官能基(すなわち、-O-、-CO-及びCOO-)のいずれかを2つ以上有する化合物も、有機溶媒として用いることができる。有機溶媒は、アルコール性ヒドロキシ基(水酸基)のような他の官能基を有していてもよい。二種類以上の官能基を有する有機溶媒の場合、その炭素原子数は、いずれかの官能基を有する化合物の規定範囲内であればよい。 The organic solvent is selected from ethers having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, ketones having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, esters having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, and halogenated hydrocarbons having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. It is preferable to include a solvent. The ether, ketone and ester may have a cyclic structure. A compound having two or more functional groups of ether, ketone and ester (that is, —O—, —CO— and COO—) can also be used as the organic solvent. The organic solvent may have another functional group such as an alcoholic hydroxy group (hydroxyl group). In the case of an organic solvent having two or more types of functional groups, the number of carbon atoms may be within the specified range of the compound having any functional group.
 炭素原子数が3~12のエーテル類の例には、ジイソプロピルエーテル、ジメトキシメタン、ジメトキシエタン、1,4-ジオキサン、1,3-ジオキソラン、テトラヒドロフラン、アニソール及びフェネトールが含まれる。 Examples of ethers having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include diisopropyl ether, dimethoxymethane, dimethoxyethane, 1,4-dioxane, 1,3-dioxolane, tetrahydrofuran, anisole and phenetole.
 炭素原子数が3~12のケトン類の例には、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、ジエチルケトン、ジイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン及びメチルシクロヘキサノンが含まれる。 Examples of ketones having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, diethyl ketone, diisobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone and methylcyclohexanone.
 炭素原子数が3~12のエステル類の例には、エチルホルメート、プロピルホルメート、ペンチルホルメート、メチルアセテート、エチルアセテート及びペンチルアセテートが含まれる。 Examples of esters having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include ethyl formate, propyl formate, pentyl formate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate and pentyl acetate.
 二種類以上の官能基を有する有機溶媒の例には、2-エトキシエチルアセテート、2-メトキシエタノール及び2-ブトキシエタノールが含まれる。 Examples of the organic solvent having two or more kinds of functional groups include 2-ethoxyethyl acetate, 2-methoxyethanol and 2-butoxyethanol.
 ハロゲン化炭化水素の炭素原子数は、1又は2であることが好ましく、1であることが最も好ましい。ハロゲン化炭化水素のハロゲンは、塩素であることが好ましい。ハロゲン化炭化水素の水素原子が、ハロゲンに置換されている割合は、25~75モル%であることが好ましく、30~70モル%であることがより好ましく、35~65モル%であることがさらに好ましく、40~60モル%であることが最も好ましい。メチレンクロリドが、代表的なハロゲン化炭化水素である。 The number of carbon atoms of the halogenated hydrocarbon is preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1. The halogen of the halogenated hydrocarbon is preferably chlorine. The proportion of halogen atoms in the halogenated hydrocarbon substituted with halogen is preferably 25 to 75 mol%, more preferably 30 to 70 mol%, and more preferably 35 to 65 mol%. More preferably, it is most preferably 40 to 60 mol%. Methylene chloride is a representative halogenated hydrocarbon.
 二種類以上の有機溶媒を混合して用いてもよい。 Two or more organic solvents may be mixed and used.
 一般的な方法でセルロースエステル溶液を調製できる。一般的な方法とは、0℃以上の温度(常温又は高温)で、処理することを意味する。溶液の調製は、通常のソルベントキャスト法におけるドープの調製方法及び装置を用いて実施することができる。なお、一般的な方法の場合は、有機溶媒としてハロゲン化炭化水素(特に、メチレンクロリド)を用いることが好ましい。 A cellulose ester solution can be prepared by a general method. A general method means processing at a temperature of 0 ° C. or higher (ordinary temperature or high temperature). The solution can be prepared by using a dope preparation method and apparatus in a normal solvent cast method. In the case of a general method, it is preferable to use a halogenated hydrocarbon (particularly, methylene chloride) as the organic solvent.
 セルロースエステルの量は、得られる溶液中に10~40質量%含まれるように調整する。セルロースエステルの量は、10~30質量%であることがさらに好ましい。有機溶媒(主溶媒)中には、任意の添加剤を添加しておいてもよい。 The amount of cellulose ester is adjusted so as to be contained in the obtained solution in an amount of 10 to 40% by mass. The amount of cellulose ester is more preferably 10 to 30% by mass. Arbitrary additives may be added to the organic solvent (main solvent).
 溶液は、常温(0~40℃)でセルロースエステルと有機溶媒とを攪拌することにより調製することができる。高濃度の溶液は、加圧及び加熱条件下で攪拌してもよい。具体的には、セルロースエステルと有機溶媒とを加圧容器に入れて密閉し、加圧下で溶媒の常温における沸点以上、かつ溶媒が沸騰しない範囲の温度に加熱しながら攪拌する。加熱温度は、通常は40℃以上であり、好ましくは60~200℃であり、さらに好ましくは80~110℃である。 The solution can be prepared by stirring the cellulose ester and the organic solvent at room temperature (0 to 40 ° C.). The high concentration solution may be stirred under pressure and heating conditions. Specifically, the cellulose ester and the organic solvent are placed in a pressure vessel and sealed, and stirred while heating to a temperature not lower than the boiling point of the solvent at normal temperature and in a range where the solvent does not boil. The heating temperature is usually 40 ° C. or higher, preferably 60 to 200 ° C., more preferably 80 to 110 ° C.
 各成分は予め粗混合してから容器に入れてもよい。また、順次容器に投入してもよい。容器は攪拌できるように構成されている必要がある。窒素ガス等の不活性気体を注入して容器を加圧することができる。また、加熱による溶媒の蒸気圧の上昇を利用してもよい。あるいは、容器を密閉後、各成分を圧力下で添加してもよい。 Each component may be roughly mixed in advance and then placed in a container. Moreover, you may put into a container sequentially. The container needs to be configured so that it can be stirred. The container can be pressurized by injecting an inert gas such as nitrogen gas. Moreover, you may utilize the raise of the vapor pressure of the solvent by heating. Or after sealing a container, you may add each component under pressure.
 加熱する場合、容器の外部より加熱することが好ましい。例えば、ジャケットタイプの加熱装置を用いることができる。また、容器の外部にプレートヒーターを設け、配管して液体を循環させることにより容器全体を加熱することもできる。 When heating, it is preferable to heat from the outside of the container. For example, a jacket type heating device can be used. The entire container can also be heated by providing a plate heater outside the container and piping to circulate the liquid.
 容器内部に攪拌翼を設けて、これを用いて攪拌することが好ましい。攪拌翼は、容器の壁付近に達する長さのものが好ましい。攪拌翼の末端には、容器の壁の液膜を更新するため、掻取翼を設けることが好ましい。 It is preferable to stir using a stirring blade provided inside the container. The stirring blade preferably has a length that reaches the vicinity of the wall of the container. A scraping blade is preferably provided at the end of the stirring blade in order to renew the liquid film on the vessel wall.
 容器には、圧力計、温度計等の計器類を設置してもよい。容器内で各成分を溶媒中に溶解する。調製したドープは冷却後容器から取り出すか、あるいは、取り出した後、熱交換器等を用いて冷却する。 容器 In the container, instruments such as a pressure gauge and a thermometer may be installed. Each component is dissolved in a solvent in a container. The prepared dope is taken out of the container after cooling, or taken out and then cooled using a heat exchanger or the like.
 冷却溶解法により、溶液を調製することもできる。冷却溶解法では、通常の溶解方法では溶解させることが困難な有機溶媒中にもセルロースエステルを溶解させることができる。なお、通常の溶解方法でセルロースエステルを溶解できる溶媒であっても、冷却溶解法によると迅速に均一な溶液が得られるとの効果がある。 The solution can also be prepared by a cooling dissolution method. In the cooling dissolution method, the cellulose ester can be dissolved in an organic solvent that is difficult to dissolve by a normal dissolution method. In addition, even if it is a solvent which can melt | dissolve a cellulose ester with a normal melt | dissolution method, there exists an effect that a uniform solution can be obtained rapidly according to a cooling melt | dissolution method.
 (濾過工程)
 セルロースエステル溶液の濾過については公知のさまざまな濾過装置を用いることができる。すなわち、濾過機としては大別すると連続濾過機と回分加圧濾過機に分けることができ、連続濾過機としてはベルト式、多重円板式、スクリュウ圧搾式、フィルタプレス式などに分けることができ、回分加圧濾過機としてはリーフ式、キャンドル式などが挙げることができる。
(Filtering process)
Various known filtration devices can be used for filtering the cellulose ester solution. That is, when roughly classified as a filter, it can be divided into a continuous filter and a batch pressure filter, and as a continuous filter, it can be divided into a belt type, a multiple disk type, a screw press type, a filter press type, etc. Examples of the batch pressure filter include a leaf type and a candle type.
 フィルタプレス装置や、ペーパフィルタ装置、リーフフィルタ装置、ドラムフィルタ装置、プリコートフィルタ装置などを用いることができる。工業的に最も有利な物はフィルタプレス装置であり、このフィルタプレス装置にプリコートをして使用する形態でも良い。フィルタプレス装置の一例を挙げれば60センチ角程度のプレートを40から50枚用い其々のプレートには網が付けられており、網の間には濾紙や綿布が設置さえる形態のものである。これらのフィルタプレス装置を複数台用いて、多段に濾過をするものでも良い。 A filter press device, a paper filter device, a leaf filter device, a drum filter device, a precoat filter device, or the like can be used. The industrially most advantageous product is a filter press apparatus, and the filter press apparatus may be pre-coated and used. As an example of the filter press apparatus, 40 to 50 plates of about 60 cm square are used, and a net is attached to each plate, and a filter paper or cotton cloth is installed between the nets. A plurality of these filter press apparatuses may be used for filtration in multiple stages.
 また、リーフフィルタ装置であって好適に用いることができる。 Also, the leaf filter device can be suitably used.
 濾過材としては、金属焼結フィルタ、金属不織布フィルタ、綿布フィルタ、紙フィルタなどを用いても良い。 As the filter material, a sintered metal filter, a non-woven metal filter, a cotton cloth filter, a paper filter, or the like may be used.
 フィルタプレス式であれば、使用する濾材は天然繊維であっても、合成繊維であっても用いることができる。濾過布に使用されている合成繊維の材質は、一般にポリプロピレン、ポリエステル(テトロン)、ナイロンを用いることができる。また、ビニロン、アクリル、サラン、なども溶媒によっては使用することができる。これら上記素材には、それぞれ材質上の特性を持っており、その特性に応じて使用することができる。天然繊維であれば綿が代表的な材質として挙げることができる。濾布に用いる原糸の種類としては、モノフィラメント、マルチフィラメント、スパン糸などが用いることができる。モノフィラメントを用いた場合にはケーキ剥離性が優れ、目詰まりも少ないが微小粒子の補足性が劣るという欠点がある。またマルチフィラメントを用いた場合には最も強いフィルタクロスが得られ、かつケーク剥離性も良いという特徴がある。スパン糸の場合にはケーク剥離が悪く、目詰まりがやや早くなる。またフィルタクロスの織組織としては、平織、綾織、朱子織があり、平織の場合には粒子の捕集性に優れるが目詰まりが早くなる。また綾織の場合には捕集性と目詰まりのバランスが取れたフィルタクロスが得られる。朱子織の場合には目詰まりが少ない物の、粒子の捕集性が悪くなる。本発明においては平織、又は綾織のフィルタクロスが適している。 If it is a filter press type, the filter medium to be used can be a natural fiber or a synthetic fiber. In general, polypropylene, polyester (tetron), and nylon can be used as the material of the synthetic fiber used for the filter cloth. Vinylon, acrylic, saran, etc. can also be used depending on the solvent. Each of these materials has characteristics on the material and can be used according to the characteristics. If it is a natural fiber, cotton can be mentioned as a typical material. Monofilaments, multifilaments, spun yarns and the like can be used as the type of raw yarn used for the filter cloth. When a monofilament is used, the cake peelability is excellent and clogging is small, but there is a disadvantage that the fine particles are poorly captured. When multifilaments are used, the strongest filter cloth is obtained and the cake peelability is good. In the case of a spun yarn, cake peeling is poor and clogging is slightly faster. The filter cloth weave includes plain weave, twill weave, and satin weave. In the case of plain weave, particles are easily collected but clogging is accelerated. In the case of twill weave, a filter cloth having a good balance between collection and clogging can be obtained. In the case of satin weaving, particles are less clogged, but the ability to collect particles is poor. In the present invention, plain or twill filter cloth is suitable.
 綿布フィルタでは、綿ネル(10号B、平織径20番単糸63本、緯10番単糸46本)、金巾(11号、平織径40番単糸100本、緯40番単糸98本)、厚綾織(26号、綾織、12番3号、64本、12番4号32本)などを用いても良い。紙フィルタでは、濾紙(300g/m)などを用いても良い。これらの濾材は組み合わせ(例えば第1濾材は綿ネル1濾紙、第2濾材は綿ネル二枚、金巾1枚、第3濾材は綿ネル1枚濾紙1枚金巾1枚)使用してもよい。 For cotton cloth filters, cotton flannel (No. 10 B, plain weave diameter No. 20 single yarn 63, weft No. 10 single yarn 46), gold width (No. 11, plain weave diameter No. 40 single yarn 100, weft No. 40 single yarn 98 pieces ), Thick twill (26, twill, 12-3, 64, 12-4, 32) may be used. In the paper filter, filter paper (300 g / m 2 ) or the like may be used. These filter media may be used in combination (for example, the first filter media is one cotton flannel filter paper, the second filter media is two cotton flanks, one gold width, and the third filter media is one cotton flannel one filter paper and one gold width).
 濾材の保留平均粒径(濾過精度)としては、1~50μmが好ましく、1~20μmがさらに好ましく、1~5μmが最も好ましい。また粒径の標準偏差は、平均粒径の0.5倍以下が好ましく、平均粒径の0.3倍以下がさらに好ましい。このような濾材を用いることで濾過性が改善され、生産性が向上する。 The retention average particle size (filtration accuracy) of the filter medium is preferably 1 to 50 μm, more preferably 1 to 20 μm, and most preferably 1 to 5 μm. Further, the standard deviation of the particle diameter is preferably 0.5 times or less of the average particle diameter, and more preferably 0.3 times or less of the average particle diameter. By using such a filter medium, filterability is improved and productivity is improved.
 濾過助剤の嵩密度は0.1~0.5g/cmの範囲がより好ましく、0.3~0.4g/cmの範囲がさらに好ましい。嵩密度がこの範囲より小さいと、ケークの空隙が大きくなり、濾過精度が低下する。逆に、嵩密度が大きいと、濾過抵抗が大きくなり、装置が大型化する。 The bulk density of the filter aid is more preferably in the range of 0.1 to 0.5 g / cm 3 , and still more preferably in the range of 0.3 to 0.4 g / cm 3 . When the bulk density is smaller than this range, the gap of the cake becomes large and the filtration accuracy is lowered. Conversely, if the bulk density is large, the filtration resistance increases and the apparatus becomes large.
 また、濾過助剤の添加量はセルロースアシレート溶液に対して0.01~10質量%に規定した。濾過助剤の添加量がこの範囲よりも小さいと、濾過助剤による目詰まり防止効果が殆ど得られない。逆に、濾過助剤の添加量が大きいと、ケーク層厚さの増加速度が大きく、これに伴ってケーク層の抵抗が急激に増加するので、ケークの洗浄、排出を頻繁に行わなくてはならない。したがって、濾過助剤の添加量は上記の範囲であることが好ましい。なお、濾過助剤の添加量は、0.05~5質量%の範囲がより好ましく、0.1~0.5質量%の範囲がさらに好ましい。 Further, the addition amount of the filter aid was regulated to 0.01 to 10% by mass with respect to the cellulose acylate solution. When the addition amount of the filter aid is smaller than this range, the clogging prevention effect by the filter aid is hardly obtained. Conversely, if the amount of filter aid added is large, the rate of increase in the thickness of the cake layer increases, and the resistance of the cake layer increases rapidly with this, so the cake must be washed and discharged frequently. Don't be. Therefore, the amount of filter aid added is preferably in the above range. The addition amount of the filter aid is more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 5% by mass, and further preferably in the range of 0.1 to 0.5% by mass.
 濾過工程での圧力は、濾過効率を考慮した上で適宜設定できる。具体的には、濾材は5から18気圧(例えば8~18気圧、例えば10~18気圧)に加圧されていても良い。セルロースエステルを有機溶媒に溶解し、濾過した上で乾燥させ得られたセルロース混合脂肪酸エステル組成物の形状は糸状体であっても良い。本発明に係るセルロース混合脂肪酸エステルを有機溶媒に溶解して濾過する工程では濾過助剤として、カオリン、酸化チタン、クレイなどを用いても良い。濾過液は40~50℃程度に保温されていても良い。濾材は5から18気圧(例えば8~18気圧、例えば10~18気圧)に加圧されていても良い。濾過を一回ではなく複数回(例えば第1濾材は綿ネル1枚、第2濾材は綿ネル二枚、金巾1枚、第3濾材は綿ネル一枚濾紙1枚金巾一枚という濾材構成を用い、同一の構成で第1回の濾過は12~18気圧、第2回の濾過は8~14気圧、第3回の濾過は5~9気圧)で行っても良い。同一の濾材構成を用いた場合には濾過圧力を第1回と第2回で変える(例えば第2回の濾過をより低圧の濾過圧力で行う)ものでもよい。 The pressure in the filtration step can be appropriately set in consideration of the filtration efficiency. Specifically, the filter medium may be pressurized to 5 to 18 atmospheres (for example, 8 to 18 atmospheres, for example, 10 to 18 atmospheres). The shape of the cellulose mixed fatty acid ester composition obtained by dissolving cellulose ester in an organic solvent, filtering and drying may be a filament. In the step of dissolving the cellulose mixed fatty acid ester according to the present invention in an organic solvent and filtering, kaolin, titanium oxide, clay or the like may be used as a filter aid. The filtrate may be kept at a temperature of about 40 to 50 ° C. The filter medium may be pressurized to 5 to 18 atmospheres (eg, 8 to 18 atmospheres, eg, 10 to 18 atmospheres). Filtering is not performed once but multiple times (for example, the first filter medium is one cotton flannel, the second filter medium is two cotton flannels, one gold width, the third filter medium is one cotton flannel, one filter paper, one gold width, one filter medium structure) In the same configuration, the first filtration may be performed at 12 to 18 atm, the second filtration at 8 to 14 atm, and the third filtration at 5 to 9 atm). When the same filter medium configuration is used, the filtration pressure may be changed between the first time and the second time (for example, the second filtration is performed at a lower pressure).
 濾過の際の温度は、濾過が可能であれば任意の温度で行うことが可能であるが、好ましくは30-100℃、より好ましくは35-80℃、さらに好ましくは40-70℃に加熱することにより溶液の粘度を低下させることができるため好ましい。 The temperature at the time of filtration can be any temperature as long as filtration is possible, but it is preferably 30-100 ° C, more preferably 35-80 ° C, and even more preferably 40-70 ° C. This is preferable because the viscosity of the solution can be lowered.
 また、濾過圧は0.001MPa~10MPaの範囲で行うことが好ましく、0.001MPa~5MPaの範囲で行うことがより好ましく、0.01MPa~1MPaの範囲で行うことがより好ましい。 The filtration pressure is preferably in the range of 0.001 MPa to 10 MPa, more preferably in the range of 0.001 MPa to 5 MPa, and more preferably in the range of 0.01 MPa to 1 MPa.
 また、濾過助剤の種類としては特に制限はないが、セルロース、ケイソウ土、パーライト、活性炭、粉末木炭が好ましく用いられ、その中でもケイソウ土が好ましい。 The type of filter aid is not particularly limited, but cellulose, diatomaceous earth, pearlite, activated carbon, and powdered charcoal are preferably used, and among them, diatomaceous earth is preferred.
 たとえば、セライト(例えばセライト類〔ジョーンズ-マンビル スケールス社(Johns-Manville Sales Corp.社)製のFilter-Cel,Celite 505,Standard Super-Cel,Celite 512,Hyflo Super-Cel,Celite 501,Celite 503,Celite 535,Celite 545,Celite 560等〕、ダイカライト類〔グレフコ インコ ユーエスエー社(Grefco,Inco,U.S.A.社)製のSuperaid,UF,Speedflow,Special Speedflow,Speedplus,Speedex等)、ラジオライト類(昭和化学工業社製のRADIOLITE#100,RADIOLITE#200,RADIOLITE#500,RADIOLITE#600,RADIOLITE#700,RADIOLITE#900,RADIOLITE#1100,RADIOLITE#100)、層状粘土鉱物(好ましくは、タルク、マイカ、カオリナイト)、二酸化ケイ素微粒子(例えば、二酸化ケイ素微粒子(例えば、富士シリシア社製シリカゲル MB-300、MB-500、フジ・シリカゲルAB型、フジ・シリカゲルA型、フジ・シリカゲルRD型、BW-25K、Merck社のSilica Gel 40、Silica Gel 60、Silica Gel 100等)などを用いても良い。これらの濾過助剤は、セルロースエステル溶液に混合し、ケーク濾過を行っても良く、ろ材の上にプレコートして、セルロースエステルが溶解した溶液を濾過してもよい。 For example, Celite (for example, Filter-Cel, Celite 505, Standard Super-Cel, Celite 512, Hyflo Super-Cel1, Celite 501 manufactured by Johns-Manville Sales Corp.) , Celite 535, Celite 545, Celite 560, etc.), Dicalite (Superref, UF, Speedflow, Special Speed, Speed, etc., manufactured by Grefco, Inco, USA) Radio lights (RADIOLITE # 100, RA manufactured by Showa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. IOLITE # 200, RADIOLITE # 500, RADIOLITE # 600, RADIOLITE # 700, RADIOLITE # 900, RADIOLITE # 1100, RADIOLITE # 100), layered clay mineral (preferably talc, mica, kaolinite), silicon dioxide fine particles (for example, Silicon dioxide fine particles (for example, silica gel MB-300, MB-500 manufactured by Fuji Silysia Co., Ltd., Fuji Silica Gel AB Type, Fuji Silica Gel A Type, Fuji Silica Gel RD Type, BW-25K, Merck Silica Gel 40, Silica Gel 60, Silica Gel 100, etc.) These filter aids may be mixed with a cellulose ester solution and subjected to cake filtration. Was collected, the solution may be filtered cellulose ester is dissolved.
 なお、本発明においては、本発明の効果発現の観点から、平均粒径が5~20μの範囲内であり、粒径標準偏差が平均粒径が0.5倍以下である濾過助剤と濾過精度が1~5μmの範囲内であるフィルタを用いて濾過することが好ましい。 In the present invention, from the viewpoint of manifestation of the effects of the present invention, a filter aid and a filtration agent having an average particle diameter in the range of 5 to 20 μm and a particle diameter standard deviation of 0.5 times or less in average particle diameter. It is preferable to perform filtration using a filter having an accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 μm.
 (流延工程)
 本発明のフィルムの製造方法において用いられる溶液流延方法は、少量で行う場合はガラスや金属の容器にドープを調製し、濾過を行った後に、ドープを平滑性の高い、ガラス板や金属板などの支持体上に小型ダイやドクターブレードなどを用いて所望の膜厚に流延する。流延後、一次乾燥を行い、支持体から剥離し、必要に応じて枠張りし、後乾燥を行う。
(Casting process)
The solution casting method used in the method for producing a film of the present invention is a glass plate or metal plate having a high smoothness after the dope is prepared in a glass or metal container and filtered after being carried out in a small amount. The film is cast to a desired film thickness on a support such as a small die or a doctor blade. After casting, primary drying is performed, and the film is peeled off from the support, framed as necessary, and post-dried.
 また、大量、特に連続的にフィルムを得る場合には、従来セルローストリアセテートフィルム製造に供する溶液流延製膜方法及び溶液流延製膜装置を用いることができる。溶解機(釜)で調製されたドープを濾過し、ドープの最終調製をする。その後ドープをドープ排出口から、例えば回転数によって高精度に定量送液できる加圧型定量ギヤポンプを通して加圧型ダイに送り、ドープを加圧型ダイの口金(スリット)からエンドレスに走行している流延部の支持体(ドラムやバンド)の上に均一に流延され、支持体がほぼ一周した剥離点で、生乾きのドープ膜(ウェブとも呼ぶ)を支持体から剥離する。得られるウェブの両端をクリップで挟み、幅保持しながらテンターで搬送して乾燥し、続いて乾燥装置のロール群で搬送し乾燥を終了して巻き取り機で所定の長さに巻き取る。テンターとロール群の乾燥装置との組み合わせはその目的により変わる。ドラム又はバンドの表面は、鏡面状態に仕上げておくことが好ましい。ソルベントキャスト法における流延及び乾燥方法については、米国特許第2,336,310号明細書、同2,367,603号明細書、同2,492,078号明細書、同2,492,977号明細書、同2,492,978号明細書、同2,607,704号明細書、同2,739,069号明細書、同2,739,070号明細書、英国特許第640731号明細書、同736892号明細書、特公昭45-4554号公報、同49-5614号公報、特開昭60-176834号公報、同60-203430号公報、同62-115035号公報に記載がある。ドープは、任意の表面温度に調整したドラム又はバンド上に流延することが好ましく用いられる。 In addition, when a film is obtained in a large amount, particularly continuously, a solution casting film forming method and a solution casting film forming apparatus conventionally used for producing a cellulose triacetate film can be used. The dope prepared in the dissolving machine (kettle) is filtered, and the dope is finally prepared. After that, the dope is sent from the dope discharge port to the pressure die through a pressure metering gear pump capable of delivering a constant amount of liquid with high accuracy, for example, by the rotational speed, and the dope is run endlessly from the die (slit) of the pressure die. The dope film (also referred to as a web) is peeled off from the support at a peeling point that is uniformly cast on the support (drum or band) and the support has almost gone around. Both ends of the obtained web are sandwiched between clips, transported by a tenter while keeping the width, dried, then transported by a roll group of a drying device, dried, and wound up to a predetermined length by a winder. The combination of the tenter and the roll group dryer varies depending on the purpose. The surface of the drum or band is preferably finished in a mirror state. The casting and drying methods in the solvent casting method are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,336,310, 2,367,603, 2,492,078, 2,492,977. No. 2,492,978, No. 2,607,704, No. 2,739,069, No. 2,739,070, British Patent No. 640731 No. 736892, JP-B 45-4554, 49-5614, JP-A-60-176834, 60-203430, and 62-1115035. The dope is preferably cast on a drum or band adjusted to an arbitrary surface temperature.
 また、積層フィルムの場合は、調製した二種以上のセルロースエステル溶液(ドープ)から、ソルベントキャスト法によりセルロースアシレテートフィルムを製造することができる。 In the case of a laminated film, a cellulose acylate film can be produced from two or more kinds of prepared cellulose ester solutions (dope) by a solvent cast method.
 ドープは、ドラム又はバンド上に流延し、溶媒を蒸発させてフィルムを形成する。流延前のドープは、固形分量が18~35質量%となるように濃度を調整することが好ましい。ドラム又はバンドの表面は、鏡面状態に仕上げておくことが好ましい。ソルベントキャスト法における流延及び乾燥方法については、米国特許2336310号、同2367603号、同2492078号、同2492977号、同2492978号、同2607704号、同2739069号、同2739070号、英国特許640731号、同736892号の各明細書、特公昭45-4554号、同49-5614号、特開昭60-176834号、同60-203430号、同62-115035号の各公報に記載がある。 The dope is cast on a drum or band, and the solvent is evaporated to form a film. The dope before casting is preferably adjusted in concentration so that the solid content is 18 to 35% by mass. The surface of the drum or band is preferably finished in a mirror state. Regarding casting and drying methods in the solvent casting method, U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,336,310, 2,367,603, 2,429,078, 2,429,297, 2,429,978, 2,607,704, 2,37,069, 2,273,070, British Patent 6,407,331, It is described in each specification of JP-A-736892, JP-B-45-4554, JP-A-49-5614, JP-A-60-176834, JP-A-60-203430, and JP-A-62-115035.
 ドープは、表面温度が10℃以下のドラム又はバンド上に流延することが好ましい。流延してから2秒以上風に当てて乾燥することが好ましい。得られたフィルムをドラム又はバンドから剥ぎ取り、さらに100℃から160℃まで逐次温度を変えた高温風で乾燥して残留溶媒を蒸発させることもできる。以上の方法は、特公平5-17844号公報に記載がある。この方法によると、流延から剥ぎ取りまでの時間を短縮することが可能である。この方法を実施するためには、流延時のドラム又はバンドの表面温度においてドープがゲル化することが必要である。 The dope is preferably cast on a drum or band having a surface temperature of 10 ° C. or lower. After casting, it is preferable to dry it by applying air for 2 seconds or more. The obtained film can be peeled off from the drum or band and further dried with high-temperature air whose temperature is successively changed from 100 ° C. to 160 ° C. to evaporate the residual solvent. The above method is described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5-17844. According to this method, it is possible to shorten the time from casting to stripping. In order to carry out this method, it is necessary for the dope to gel at the surface temperature of the drum or band during casting.
 本発明では得られたセルロースエステル溶液(ドープ)を、支持体としての平滑なバンド上或いはドラム上に前記二種以上の複数のセルロースエステル液を流延して製膜する。本発明のフィルムの製造方法としては、上記以外に特に制限はなく公知の共流延方法を用いることができる。例えば、金属支持体の進行方向に間隔を置いて設けた複数の流延口からセルロースエステルを含有する溶液をそれぞれ流延させて積層させながらフィルムを作製してもよく、例えば特開昭61-158414号、特開平1-122419号、特開平11-198285号の各公報などに記載の方法が適応できる。また、2つの流延口からセルロースエステル溶液を流延することによってもフィルム化することでもよく、例えば特公昭60-27562号、特開昭61-94724号、特開昭61-947245号、特開昭61-104813号、特開昭61-158413号、特開平6-134933号の各公報に記載の方法で実施できる。また、特開昭56-162617号公報に記載の高粘度セルロースエステル溶液の流れを低粘度のセルロースエステル溶液で包み込み、その高,低粘度のセルロースエステル溶液を同時に押出すセルロースエステルフィルム流延方法でもよい。更に又、特開昭61-94724号、特開昭61-94725号の各公報に記載の外側の溶液が内側の溶液よりも貧溶媒であるアルコール成分を多く含有させることも好ましい態様である。 In the present invention, the obtained cellulose ester solution (dope) is formed by casting the two or more cellulose ester solutions on a smooth band or drum as a support. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a manufacturing method of the film of this invention other than the above, A well-known co-casting method can be used. For example, a film may be produced by laminating and laminating a solution containing a cellulose ester from a plurality of casting openings provided at intervals in the traveling direction of the metal support. The methods described in JP-A Nos. 158414, 1-122419, and 11-198285 can be applied. A film may be formed by casting a cellulose ester solution from two casting ports. For example, JP-B-60-27562, JP-A-61-94724, JP-A-61-947245, It can be carried out by the methods described in JP-A Nos. 61-104813, 61-158413, and 6-134933. Also, the cellulose ester film casting method described in JP-A-56-162617 is a method of wrapping a flow of a high-viscosity cellulose ester solution with a low-viscosity cellulose ester solution and simultaneously extruding the high- and low-viscosity cellulose ester solution. Good. Furthermore, it is also a preferred embodiment that the outer solution described in JP-A-61-94724 and JP-A-61-94725 contains a larger amount of an alcohol component which is a poor solvent than the inner solution.
 あるいは、また、2個の流延口を用いて、第1の流延口により金属支持体に成型したフィルムを剥離し、金属支持体面に接していた側に第2の流延を行うことでより、フィルムを作製することでもよく、例えば特公昭44-20235号公報に記載されている方法である。流延するセルロースエステル溶液は同一の溶液でもよいし、異なるセルロースエステル溶液でもよく特に限定されない。複数のセルロースエステル層に機能を持たせるために、その機能に応じたセルロースエステル溶液を、それぞれの流延口から押出せばよい。さらに本発明に係るセルロースエステル溶液は、他の機能層(例えば、接着層、染料層、帯電防止層、アンチハレーション層、UV吸収層、偏光層など)を同時に流延することも実施しうる。本発明のフィルムを製造する方法としては、製膜が同時又は逐次での多層流延製膜であることが好ましい。 Alternatively, by using two casting ports, the film cast on the metal support is peeled off by the first casting port, and the second casting is performed on the side that is in contact with the metal support surface. Further, a film may be produced, for example, a method described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 44-20235. The cellulose ester solution to be cast may be the same solution or different cellulose ester solutions and is not particularly limited. In order to give a function to a plurality of cellulose ester layers, a cellulose ester solution corresponding to the function may be extruded from each casting port. Further, the cellulose ester solution according to the present invention can be cast simultaneously with other functional layers (for example, an adhesive layer, a dye layer, an antistatic layer, an antihalation layer, a UV absorbing layer, a polarizing layer). As a method for producing the film of the present invention, it is preferred that the film formation is simultaneous or sequential multilayer casting film formation.
 従来の単層液では、必要なフィルム厚さにするためには高濃度で高粘度のセルロースエステル溶液を押出すことが必要であり、その場合セルロースエステル溶液の安定性が悪くて固形物が発生し、ブツ故障となったり、平面性が不良であったりして問題となることが多かった。この解決として、複数のセルロースエステル溶液を流延口から流延することにより、高粘度の溶液を同時に金属支持体上に押出すことができ、平面性も良化し優れた面状のフィルムが作製できるばかりでなく、濃厚なセルロースエステル溶液を用いることで乾燥負荷の低減化が達成でき、フィルムの生産スピードを高めることができた。 In conventional single-layer liquids, it is necessary to extrude a high-concentration and high-viscosity cellulose ester solution to obtain the required film thickness. In this case, the stability of the cellulose ester solution is poor and solids are generated. In many cases, however, it becomes a problem due to a failure or poor flatness. As a solution to this, by casting multiple cellulose ester solutions from the casting port, a highly viscous solution can be extruded onto a metal support at the same time. In addition to being able to reduce the drying load by using a concentrated cellulose ester solution, the production speed of the film could be increased.
 共流延の場合、内側と外側の厚さは特に限定されないが、好ましくは外側が全膜厚の0.2~50%であることが好ましく、より好ましくは2~30%の厚さである。ここで、三層以上の共流延の場合は金属支持体に接した層と空気側に接した層のトータル膜厚を外側の厚さと定義する。 In the case of co-casting, the inner and outer thicknesses are not particularly limited, but preferably the outer side is preferably 0.2 to 50% of the total film thickness, more preferably 2 to 30%. . Here, in the case of co-casting with three or more layers, the total thickness of the layer in contact with the metal support and the layer in contact with the air side is defined as the outer thickness.
 共流延の場合、前述の可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、マット剤等の添加物濃度が異なるセルロースエステル溶液を共流延して、積層構造のセルロースエステルフィルムを作製することもできる。例えば、スキン層/コア層/スキン層といった構成のセルロースエステルフィルムを作ることができる。例えば、マット剤は、スキン層に多く、又はスキン層のみに入れることができる。可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤はスキン層よりもコア層に多くいれることができ、コア層のみにいれてもよい。又、コア層とスキン層で可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤の種類を変更することもでき、例えばスキン層に低揮発性の可塑剤及び/又は紫外線吸収剤を含ませ、コア層に可塑性に優れた可塑剤、或いは紫外線吸収性に優れた紫外線吸収剤を添加することもできる。また、剥離剤を金属支持体側のスキン層のみ含有させることも好ましい態様である。また、冷却ドラム法で金属支持体を冷却して溶液をゲル化させるために、スキン層に貧溶媒であるアルコールをコア層より多く添加することも好ましい。スキン層とコア層のTgが異なっていても良く、スキン層のTgよりコア層のTgが低いことが好ましい。又、流延時のセルロースエステルを含有する溶液の粘度もスキン層とコア層で異なっていても良く、スキン層の粘度がコア層の粘度よりも小さいことが好ましいが、コア層の粘度がスキン層の粘度より小さくてもよい。 In the case of co-casting, a cellulose ester film having a laminated structure can be produced by co-casting cellulose ester solutions having different additive concentrations such as the above-mentioned plasticizer, ultraviolet absorber and matting agent. For example, a cellulose ester film having a structure of skin layer / core layer / skin layer can be produced. For example, the matting agent can be contained in the skin layer in a large amount or only in the skin layer. The plasticizer and the ultraviolet absorber can be contained in the core layer more than the skin layer, and may be contained only in the core layer. In addition, the type of plasticizer and ultraviolet absorber can be changed between the core layer and the skin layer. For example, the skin layer contains a low-volatile plasticizer and / or an ultraviolet absorber, and the core layer has excellent plasticity. It is also possible to add a plasticizer or an ultraviolet absorber excellent in ultraviolet absorption. Moreover, it is also a preferable aspect that a release agent is contained only in the skin layer on the metal support side. It is also preferable to add more alcohol, which is a poor solvent, to the skin layer than the core layer in order to cool the metal support by the cooling drum method to gel the solution. The Tg of the skin layer and the core layer may be different, and the Tg of the core layer is preferably lower than the Tg of the skin layer. Further, the viscosity of the solution containing the cellulose ester during casting may be different between the skin layer and the core layer, and the viscosity of the skin layer is preferably smaller than the viscosity of the core layer. It may be smaller than the viscosity.
 (乾燥工程)
 ドラムやベルト上で乾燥され、剥離されたウェブの乾燥方法について述べる。ドラムやベルトが1周する直前の剥離位置で剥離されたウェブは、千鳥状に配置されたロール群に交互に通して搬送する方法や剥離されたウェブの両端をクリップ等で把持させて非接触的に搬送する方法などにより搬送される。乾燥は、搬送中のウェブ(フィルム)両面に所定の温度の風を当てる方法やマイクロウエーブなどの加熱手段などを用いる方法によって行われる。急速な乾燥は、形成されるフィルムの平面性を損なう恐れがあるので、乾燥の初期段階では、溶媒が発泡しない程度の温度で乾燥し、乾燥が進んでから高温で乾燥を行うのが好ましい。支持体から剥離した後の乾燥工程では、溶媒の蒸発によってフィルムは長手方向あるいは幅方向に収縮しようとする。収縮は、高温度で乾燥するほど大きくなる。この収縮を可能な限り抑制しながら乾燥することが、でき上がったフィルムの平面性を良好にする上で好ましい。この点から、例えば、特開昭62-46625号公報に示されているように、乾燥の全工程あるいは一部の工程を幅方向にクリップあるいはピンでウェブの幅両端を幅保持しつつ行う方法(テンター方式)が好ましい。上記乾燥工程における乾燥温度は、100~145℃であることが好ましい。使用する溶媒によって乾燥温度、乾燥風量及び乾燥時間が異なるが、使用溶媒の種類、組合せに応じて適宜選べばよい。本発明のフィルムの製造では、支持体から剥離したウェブ(フィルム)を、ウェブ中の残留溶媒量が120質量%未満の時に延伸することが好ましい。
(Drying process)
A method for drying a web that has been dried on a drum or belt and peeled off will be described. The web peeled at the peeling position just before the drum or belt makes one round is conveyed by alternately passing through a group of rolls arranged in a staggered manner, or the both ends of the peeled web are gripped by clips or the like and are not contacted. It is conveyed by the method of conveying it automatically. Drying is performed by a method of applying wind at a predetermined temperature to both sides of the web (film) being conveyed or a method using a heating means such as a microwave. Since rapid drying may impair the flatness of the film to be formed, it is preferable to dry at a temperature at which the solvent does not foam in the initial stage of drying, and to dry at a high temperature after the drying proceeds. In the drying process after peeling from the support, the film tends to shrink in the longitudinal direction or the width direction by evaporation of the solvent. Shrinkage increases with drying at higher temperatures. Drying while suppressing this shrinkage as much as possible is preferable for improving the flatness of the finished film. From this point, for example, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 62-46625, a method in which all or part of the drying process is performed while holding the width at both ends of the web with clips or pins in the width direction. (Tenter method) is preferred. The drying temperature in the drying step is preferably 100 to 145 ° C. The drying temperature, the amount of drying air, and the drying time vary depending on the solvent used, but may be appropriately selected according to the type and combination of the solvents used. In the production of the film of the present invention, the web (film) peeled from the support is preferably stretched when the amount of residual solvent in the web is less than 120% by mass.
 なお、残留溶媒量は下記の式で表せる。 The residual solvent amount can be expressed by the following formula.
 残留溶媒量(質量%)={(M-N)/N}×100
 ここで、Mはウェブの任意時点での質量、NはMを測定したウェブを110℃で3時間乾燥させた時の質量である。
Residual solvent amount (% by mass) = {(MN) / N} × 100
Here, M is the mass of the web at an arbitrary point in time, and N is the mass when the web of which M is measured is dried at 110 ° C. for 3 hours.
 (延伸工程)
 本発明においては、フィルム性能を向上させるために積極的に幅方向に延伸してもよく、例えば、特開昭62-115035号公報、特開平4-152125号、同4-284211号公報、同4-298310号公報、同11-48271号公報などに記載されている方法を適用できる。フィルムの延伸は、一般にはTg(ガラス転移温度)よりもさらに10~20℃高い温度で行う場合が多いが、本発明のフィルムはガラス転移温度が高く、ガラス転移温度以上に加熱することでポリマーの分解が開始する場合がある。このような場合、本発明では特に本発明のフィルムの乾燥中の処理で延伸することが有効である。つまり溶媒を含んだ見かけのガラス転移温度が低い状態で延伸を行うことでポリマーの分解を起こさない温度で延伸することができる。その延伸方法としては、例えば、剥ぎ取り時の場合フィルムの搬送ローラーの速度を調節して、フィルムの剥ぎ取り速度よりもフィルムの巻き取り速度の方を速くするとフィルムは延伸される。また、剥ぎ取り後の乾燥時の場合、搬送方向手前側の搬送ローラーの搬送速度に対して搬送先の搬送ローラーの搬送速度を速くすることでフィルムは延伸される。また、フィルムの巾をテンターで保持しながら搬送して、テンターの巾を徐々に広げることでフィルムを幅方向に延伸できる。
(Stretching process)
In the present invention, in order to improve the film performance, it may be positively stretched in the width direction. For example, JP-A-62-115035, JP-A-4-152125, JP-A-4-284221, The methods described in JP-A-4-298310 and JP-A-11-48271 can be applied. In many cases, the film is stretched at a temperature 10 to 20 ° C. higher than Tg (glass transition temperature). However, the film of the present invention has a high glass transition temperature and is heated to a temperature higher than the glass transition temperature. Decomposition may begin. In such a case, in the present invention, it is particularly effective to stretch the film of the present invention by treatment during drying. That is, by performing stretching in a state where the apparent glass transition temperature containing the solvent is low, stretching can be performed at a temperature at which the polymer does not decompose. As the stretching method, for example, in the case of stripping, the film is stretched by adjusting the speed of the film transport roller so that the film winding speed is higher than the film stripping speed. In the case of drying after peeling, the film is stretched by increasing the transport speed of the transport roller at the transport destination relative to the transport speed of the transport roller on the near side in the transport direction. Further, the film can be stretched in the width direction by conveying the film while holding the film with a tenter and gradually increasing the width of the tenter.
 フィルムの延伸倍率(元の長さに対する延伸後の長さの倍率)は、1.03~3倍であることが好ましく、さらに好ましいのは1.05~2.5倍であり、より好ましくは1.05~1.8倍である。この時、延伸方向は流延方向でもよいし、流延方向と直角な方向に延伸されてもよく、さらに場合によっては両方向に延伸されてもよい。この時、延伸は同時に実施されてもよく、一方向に延伸してその後別方向に延伸されてもよい。 The stretching ratio of the film (the ratio of the length after stretching relative to the original length) is preferably 1.03 to 3 times, more preferably 1.05 to 2.5 times, and more preferably 1.05 to 1.8 times. At this time, the stretching direction may be the casting direction, may be stretched in a direction perpendicular to the casting direction, or may be stretched in both directions depending on circumstances. At this time, stretching may be performed simultaneously, or stretching in one direction and then stretching in another direction.
 本発明におけるセルロースエステルフィルムの製造に係わる巻き取り機は一般的に使用されているものでよく、定テンション法、定トルク法、テーパーテンション法、内部応力一定のプログラムテンションコントロール法などの巻き取り方法で巻き取ることができる。本発明のでき上がり(乾燥後)の本発明におけるポリマーフィルムの厚さは、使用目的によって異なるが、通常20から500μmの範囲が好ましく、さらに30~250μmの範囲が好ましく、特に30~150μmの範囲が最も好ましい。フィルム厚さの調製は、所望の厚さになるように、ドープ中に含まれる固形分濃度、ダイの口金のスリット間隙、ダイからの押し出し圧力、支持体速度等を調節すればよい。 The winding machine relating to the production of the cellulose ester film in the present invention may be generally used, such as a constant tension method, a constant torque method, a taper tension method, a program tension control method with a constant internal stress, and the like. Can be rolled up. The thickness of the polymer film in the present invention (after drying) varies depending on the purpose of use, but is usually preferably in the range of 20 to 500 μm, more preferably in the range of 30 to 250 μm, particularly in the range of 30 to 150 μm. Most preferred. The film thickness may be adjusted by adjusting the solid content concentration contained in the dope, the slit gap of the die base, the extrusion pressure from the die, the support speed, and the like so as to obtain a desired thickness.
 延伸速度は5%/分~1000%/分であることが好ましく、さらに10%/分~500%/分であることが好ましい。延伸はヒートロールあるいは/及び放射熱源(IRヒーター等)、温風により行うことが好ましい。また、温度の均一性を高めるために恒温槽を設けてもよい。ロール延伸で一軸延伸を行う場合、ロール間距離(L)とフィルム幅(W)との比であるL/Wが、2.0~5.0であることが好ましい。さらに、テンター乾燥のウェブの発泡を防止し、離脱性を向上させ、発塵を防止するために、乾燥装置において乾燥器の熱風や熱源がウェブ両縁部に当たらないように、乾燥器の幅がウェブの幅よりも短く形成することも好ましい。また、テンターの保持部に熱風や熱源が当たらないようウェブ両側端部内側に遮蔽板を設置してもよい。 The stretching speed is preferably 5% / min to 1000% / min, more preferably 10% / min to 500% / min. The stretching is preferably performed by a heat roll or / and a radiant heat source (such as an IR heater) or warm air. Moreover, you may provide a thermostat in order to improve the uniformity of temperature. When uniaxial stretching is performed by roll stretching, L / W, which is a ratio of the distance between rolls (L) and the film width (W), is preferably 2.0 to 5.0. Furthermore, in order to prevent foaming of the tenter-dried web, improve detachability, and prevent dust generation, the width of the dryer should be set so that the hot air and heat source of the dryer do not hit the edges of the web in the dryer. However, it is also preferable that the length is shorter than the width of the web. Moreover, you may install a shielding board inside web both ends so that a hot air and a heat source may not hit a holding | maintenance part of a tenter.
 延伸フィルムは所定の厚さにすべき延伸倍率を選定すればよい。また、延伸することにより平面性などの面状の改良が達成でき好ましい場合がある。さらに、厚さのムラをより小さくするために、延伸温度を幅方向に勾配を持たせることで、一定の温度で延伸するより一層均一な延伸が達成できる場合もある。 The stretch ratio for the stretched film should be a predetermined thickness. Further, by stretching, it may be preferable that an improvement in planarity such as flatness can be achieved. Furthermore, in order to reduce the unevenness in thickness, by providing a gradient in the width direction of the stretching temperature, it may be possible to achieve more uniform stretching than stretching at a constant temperature.
 (光学部材の説明)
 [偏光板]
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムは、光学発現性が高いため、位相差フィルムとして偏光板用保護フィルムに好ましく用いられる。偏光板は、偏光子の少なくとも一方の面に保護フィルムを貼り合わせ積層することによって形成される。偏光子は従来から公知のものを用いることができ、例えば、ポリビニルアルコールフィルムの如きの親水性ポリマーフィルムを、沃素のような二色性染料で処理して延伸したものである。セルロースエステルフィルムと偏光子との貼り合わせは、特に限定はないが、水溶性ポリマーの水溶液からなる接着剤により行うことができる。この水溶性ポリマー接着剤は完全鹸化型のポリビニルアルコール水溶液が好ましく用いられる。
(Description of optical member)
[Polarizer]
Since the cellulose ester film of the present invention has high optical expression, it is preferably used as a retardation film as a protective film for a polarizing plate. The polarizing plate is formed by laminating and laminating a protective film on at least one surface of the polarizer. A conventionally known polarizer can be used. For example, a hydrophilic polymer film such as a polyvinyl alcohol film is treated with a dichroic dye such as iodine and stretched. The bonding of the cellulose ester film and the polarizer is not particularly limited, but can be performed with an adhesive made of an aqueous solution of a water-soluble polymer. The water-soluble polymer adhesive is preferably a completely saponified polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution.
 本発明のフィルムは、偏光板用保護フィルム/偏光子/偏光板用保護フィルム/液晶セル/本発明のフィルム/偏光子/偏光板用保護フィルムの構成、もしくは偏光板用保護フィルム/偏光子/本発明のフィルム/液晶セル/本発明のフィルム/偏光子/偏光板用保護フィルムの構成で好ましく用いることができる。特に、TN型、VA型、OCB型などの液晶セルに貼り合わせて用いることによって、さらに視野角に優れ、着色が少ない視認性に優れた表示装置を提供することができる。特に本発明に係る偏光板用保護フィルムを用いた偏光板は高温高湿条件下での劣化が少なく、長期間安定した性能を維持することができる。 The film of the present invention is a protective film for polarizing plate / polarizer / protective film for polarizing plate / liquid crystal cell / film of the present invention / polarizer / protective film for polarizing plate, or protective film for polarizing plate / polarizer / It can use preferably by the structure of the film / liquid crystal cell of this invention / film of this invention / polarizer / protective film for polarizing plates. In particular, by bonding to a liquid crystal cell such as a TN type, a VA type, or an OCB type, it is possible to provide a display device that is further excellent in viewing angle and visibility with little coloring. In particular, a polarizing plate using the protective film for a polarizing plate according to the present invention has little deterioration under high temperature and high humidity conditions, and can maintain stable performance for a long time.
 [液晶表示装置]
 本発明のセルロースエステルフィルム、当該フィルムを用いた偏光板は、様々な表示モードの液晶セル、液晶表示装置に用いることができる。TN(Twisted Nematic)、IPS(In-Plane Switching)、FLC(Ferroelectric Liquid Crystal)、AFLC(Anti-ferroelectric Liquid Crystal)、OCB(Optically Compensatory Bend)、STN(Supper Twisted Nematic)、VA(Vertically Aligned)及びHAN(Hybrid Aligned Nematic)のような様々な表示モードが提案されている。
[Liquid Crystal Display]
The cellulose ester film of the present invention and the polarizing plate using the film can be used for liquid crystal cells and liquid crystal display devices in various display modes. TN (Twisted Nematic), IPS (In-Plane Switching), FLC (Ferroelectric Liquid Crystal), AFLC (Anti-Frequential Liquid Nyst) Various display modes such as HAN (Hybrid Aligned Nematic) have been proposed.
 OCBモードの液晶セルは、棒状液晶性分子を液晶セルの上部と下部とで実質的に逆の方向に(対称的に)配向させるベンド配向モードの液晶セルを用いた液晶表示装置である。OCBモードの液晶セルは、米国特許第4583825号、同5410422号の各明細書に開示されている。棒状液晶分子が液晶セルの上部と下部とで対称的に配向しているため、ベンド配向モードの液晶セルは、自己光学補償機能を有する。ベンド配向モードの液晶表示装置は、応答速度が速いとの利点がある。 The OCB mode liquid crystal cell is a liquid crystal display device using a bend alignment mode liquid crystal cell in which rod-like liquid crystalline molecules are aligned in a substantially opposite direction (symmetrically) between the upper part and the lower part of the liquid crystal cell. OCB mode liquid crystal cells are disclosed in US Pat. Nos. 4,583,825 and 5,410,422. Since the rod-like liquid crystal molecules are aligned symmetrically between the upper part and the lower part of the liquid crystal cell, the bend alignment mode liquid crystal cell has a self-optical compensation function. The bend alignment mode liquid crystal display device has an advantage of high response speed.
 VAモードの液晶セルでは、電圧無印加時に棒状液晶性分子が実質的に垂直に配向している。 In a VA mode liquid crystal cell, rod-like liquid crystal molecules are aligned substantially vertically when no voltage is applied.
 VAモードの液晶セルには、(1)棒状液晶性分子を電圧無印加時に実質的に垂直に配向させ、電圧印加時に実質的に水平に配向させる狭義のVAモードの液晶セル(特開平2-176625号公報記載)に加えて、(2)視野角拡大のため、VAモードをマルチドメイン化した(MVAモードの)液晶セル(SID97、Digest of tech. Papers(予稿集)28(1997)845記載)、(3)棒状液晶性分子を電圧無印加時に実質的に垂直配向させ、電圧印加時にねじれマルチドメイン配向させるモード(n-ASMモード)の液晶セル(シャープ技報第80号11頁)及び(4)SURVAIVALモードの液晶セル(月刊ディスプレイ5月号14頁(1999年))が含まれる。 The VA mode liquid crystal cell includes: (1) a narrowly defined VA mode liquid crystal cell in which rod-like liquid crystalline molecules are aligned substantially vertically when no voltage is applied, and substantially horizontally when a voltage is applied (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 2-). (2) described in (2) liquid crystal cell (SID97, Digest of tech. Papers 28 (1997) 845 with VA mode multi-domain (MVA mode) for viewing angle expansion. ), (3) a liquid crystal cell (n-ASM mode) in which rod-like liquid crystalline molecules are substantially vertically aligned when no voltage is applied and twisted multi-domain alignment is applied when a voltage is applied (Sharp Technical Report No. 80, page 11); (4) A SURVAVAL mode liquid crystal cell (Monthly Display May 14th page (1999)) is included.
 VAモードの液晶表示装置は、液晶セル及びその両側に配置された二枚の偏光板からなる。液晶セルは、二枚の電極基板の間に液晶を担持している。本発明における透過型液晶表示装置の一つの態様では、本発明のフィルムは、液晶セルと一方の偏光板との間に、一枚配置するか、あるいは液晶セルと双方の偏光板との間に二枚配置する。 The VA mode liquid crystal display device comprises a liquid crystal cell and two polarizing plates disposed on both sides thereof. The liquid crystal cell carries a liquid crystal between two electrode substrates. In one aspect of the transmission type liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the film of the present invention is disposed between the liquid crystal cell and one polarizing plate, or between the liquid crystal cell and both polarizing plates. Arrange two.
 本発明に係る透過型液晶表示装置の別の態様では、液晶セルと偏光子との間に配置される偏光板の透明保護フィルムとして、本発明のフィルムからなる光学補償シートが用いられる。一方の偏光板の(液晶セルと偏光子との間の)保護フィルムのみに上記の光学補償シートを用いてもよいし、あるいは双方の偏光板の(液晶セルと偏光子との間の)二枚の保護フィルムに、上記の光学補償シートを用いてもよい。一方の偏光板のみに上記光学補償シートを使用する場合は、液晶セルのバックライト側偏光板の液晶セル側保護フィルムとして使用するのが特に好ましい。液晶セルへの張り合わせは、本発明のフィルムはVAセル側にすることが好ましい。保護フィルムは通常のセルロースエステルフィルムでも良く、本発明のフィルムより薄いことが好ましい。例えば、40~80μmが好ましく、市販のKC4UY(コニカミノルタオプト株式会社製40μm)、KC5UX(コニカミノルタオプト株式会社製60μm)、TD80(富士フイルム製80μm)等が挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。 In another aspect of the transmissive liquid crystal display device according to the present invention, an optical compensation sheet made of the film of the present invention is used as a transparent protective film for a polarizing plate disposed between a liquid crystal cell and a polarizer. The above optical compensation sheet may be used only for the protective film (between the liquid crystal cell and the polarizer) of one polarizing plate, or two (between the liquid crystal cell and the polarizer) of both polarizing plates. You may use said optical compensation sheet for a sheet of protective film. When the optical compensation sheet is used for only one polarizing plate, it is particularly preferable to use it as a protective film for the liquid crystal cell side of the backlight side polarizing plate of the liquid crystal cell. For the lamination to the liquid crystal cell, the film of the present invention is preferably on the VA cell side. The protective film may be a normal cellulose ester film, and is preferably thinner than the film of the present invention. For example, 40 to 80 μm is preferable, and examples thereof include, but are not limited to, commercially available KC4UY (40 μm manufactured by Konica Minolta Opto), KC5UX (60 μm manufactured by Konica Minolta Opto), TD80 (80 μm manufactured by Fujifilm), and the like.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。以下に記載の「部」は「質量部」を表す。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. “Part” described below represents “part by mass”.
 実施例1
 (ドープ調製)
 <1-1>セルロースエステル溶液
 下記組成物をミキシングタンクに投入し、攪拌して各成分を溶解し、さらに、90℃で約10分間加熱した。濾過助剤としてセライト(平均粒径10μm、粒径標準偏差3μm)を使用した。この濾過助剤をボディフィード用として、セルロースエステル溶液に対して、0.2%添加した。また、プレコート用として、終末速度10-3cm/sのプレコート用液を作製し、厚さ2mm、0.8kg/mのプレコート層を形成した。そして、濾過流速0.4cm/hr、初期圧0.3MPaで濾過処理を開始し、ケーク層の最終厚さが40mmになるまで濾過を行った。ケーク層の支持体は、平均濾過精度3μmの焼結金属フィルタを使用した。
Example 1
(Dope preparation)
<1-1> Cellulose Ester Solution The following composition was placed in a mixing tank, stirred to dissolve each component, and further heated at 90 ° C. for about 10 minutes. Celite (average particle size 10 μm, particle size standard deviation 3 μm) was used as a filter aid. 0.2% of this filter aid was added to the cellulose ester solution for body feed. Further, a precoat solution having an end speed of 10 −3 cm / s was prepared for precoat, and a precoat layer having a thickness of 2 mm and 0.8 kg / m 2 was formed. Then, filtration was started at a filtration flow rate of 0.4 cm / hr and an initial pressure of 0.3 MPa, and filtration was performed until the final thickness of the cake layer was 40 mm. As the support for the cake layer, a sintered metal filter having an average filtration accuracy of 3 μm was used.
 表3に記載のセルロースエステル1           100質量部
 添加剤1                        10質量部
 ジクロロメタン                    406質量部
 メタノール                       61質量部
 なお、ドープの原料として用いたセルロースエステル樹脂及び各種添加剤は、あらかじめ、(株)奈良機械製作所製のサイロを用いて120℃にて2時間乾燥を行ったものを用いた。
Cellulose ester 1 listed in Table 3 100 parts by mass Additive 1 10 parts by mass Dichloromethane 406 parts by mass Methanol 61 parts by mass In addition, the cellulose ester resin and various additives used as the raw material of the dope were previously prepared by Nara Machinery Co., Ltd. A product obtained by drying at 120 ° C. for 2 hours using a silo made by the method was used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
 (流延)
 上述のドープを、バンド流延機を用いて、流延した。バンド上の給気温度80~130℃(排気温度は75~120℃)で乾燥させた後、残留溶媒量が25~35質量%でバンドから剥ぎ取ったフィルムを、給気温度130℃(排気温度は90~125℃の範囲)のテンターゾーンで、30%の延伸倍率で幅方向に延伸して、セルロースエステルフィルムを製造した。このとき、延伸後の膜厚が45μmになるように、流延膜厚を調整した。
(Casting)
The above dope was cast using a band casting machine. After drying at a supply temperature of 80 to 130 ° C. (exhaust temperature is 75 to 120 ° C.) on the band, a film peeled off from the band with a residual solvent amount of 25 to 35% by mass is supplied to a supply temperature of 130 ° C. (exhaust temperature). A cellulose ester film was produced by stretching in the width direction at a stretching ratio of 30% in a tenter zone having a temperature ranging from 90 to 125 ° C. At this time, the cast film thickness was adjusted so that the film thickness after stretching was 45 μm.
 表3、4、5、及び6に示した組成のフィルムを作製し、その製造適性を判断する目的で、ロール幅2.5m、フィルム長5000mのロールを作製し、これを実施例1のフィルムとした。また得られたフィルムの残留溶媒量は0.01質量%であった。 For the purpose of producing films having the compositions shown in Tables 3, 4, 5, and 6 and judging the suitability for production, a roll having a roll width of 2.5 m and a film length of 5000 m was produced. It was. Moreover, the residual solvent amount of the obtained film was 0.01 mass%.
 [実施例2、比較例11~14]
 表3、4、5、及び6に記載のように、セルロースエステル、添加剤、濾過助剤、フィルタなどを変更した以外は実施例1と同様にして、各実施例、比較例のフィルムを得た。なお、表4に記載した添加剤1の内容は下記の通りである。
[Example 2, Comparative Examples 11 to 14]
As described in Tables 3, 4, 5, and 6, films of each example and comparative example were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that cellulose ester, additives, filter aids, filters, and the like were changed. It was. In addition, the content of the additive 1 described in Table 4 is as follows.
 添加剤1:コハク酸/アジピン酸/エチレングリコール共重合体。共重合比3:2:5。分子量2000。 Additive 1: Succinic acid / adipic acid / ethylene glycol copolymer. Copolymerization ratio 3: 2: 5. Molecular weight 2000.
 [実施例3]
 下記組成物をミキシングタンクに投入し、攪拌して各成分を溶解し、さらに90℃で約10分間加熱した。濾過助剤としてセライト(平均粒径5μm、粒径標準偏差1.5μm)を使用した。この濾過助剤をボディフィード用として、セルロースエステル溶液に対して、0.2%添加した。また、プレコート用として、終末速度10-3cm/sのプレコート用液を作製し、厚さ2mm、0.8kg/mのプレコート層を形成した。そして、濾過流速0.4cm/hr、初期圧0.3MPaで濾過処理を開始し、ケーク層の最終厚さが40mmになるまで濾過を行った。ケーク層の支持体は、平均濾過精度2μmの焼結金属フィルタを使用した。
[Example 3]
The following composition was put into a mixing tank, stirred to dissolve each component, and further heated at 90 ° C. for about 10 minutes. Celite (average particle size 5 μm, particle size standard deviation 1.5 μm) was used as a filter aid. 0.2% of this filter aid was added to the cellulose ester solution for body feed. Further, a precoat solution having an end speed of 10 −3 cm / s was prepared for precoat, and a precoat layer having a thickness of 2 mm and 0.8 kg / m 2 was formed. Then, filtration was started at a filtration flow rate of 0.4 cm / hr and an initial pressure of 0.3 MPa, and filtration was performed until the final thickness of the cake layer was 40 mm. As the support for the cake layer, a sintered metal filter having an average filtration accuracy of 2 μm was used.
 (コア層用セルロースエステルドープの調整)
 セルロースエステル樹脂:表3に記載のもの       100質量部
 添加剤1:表4に記載のもの     表4に記載の量(単位:質量部)
 ジクロロメタン                    406質量部
 メタノール                       61質量部
 (スキンB層用セルロースエステルドープの調整)
 セルロースエステル樹脂:表3に記載のもの       100質量部
 添加剤A:表5に記載のもの     表5に記載の量(単位:質量部)
 マット剤:平均粒子径16nmのシリカ粒子(aerosil R972
 日本アエロジル(株)製)              0.05質量部
 剥離促進剤:クエン酸の部分エチルエステル化合物   0.05質量部
 ジクロロメタン                    406質量部
 メタノール                       61質量部
 (スキンA層用セルロースエステルドープの調整)
 セルロースエステル樹脂:表3に記載のもの       100質量部
 添加剤A:表5記載のもの      表5に記載の量(単位:質量部)
 マット剤:平均粒子径16nmのシリカ粒子(aerosil R972
 日本アエロジル(株)製)              0.05質量部
 ジクロロメタン                    406質量部
 メタノール                       61質量部
 ドープを流延する際には、図1に示すように、走行する流延バンド上に流延ダイから上記3種類のドープを共に流延した。ここで、各ドープの流延量を調整することによりコア層を最も厚くし、結果的に延伸後のフィルムの膜厚が下記表4の値となるように同時多層流延を行い流延膜を形成させた。
(Adjustment of cellulose ester dope for core layer)
Cellulose ester resin: those listed in Table 3 100 parts by mass Additive 1: those listed in Table 4 Amounts listed in Table 4 (unit: parts by mass)
Dichloromethane 406 parts by mass Methanol 61 parts by mass (adjustment of cellulose ester dope for skin B layer)
Cellulose ester resin: those listed in Table 3 100 parts by mass Additive A: those listed in Table 5 Amounts listed in Table 5 (unit: parts by mass)
Matting agent: silica particles having an average particle diameter of 16 nm (aerosil R972)
Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) 0.05 parts by weight Peeling accelerator: partial ethyl ester compound of citric acid 0.05 parts by weight dichloromethane 406 parts by weight methanol 61 parts by weight (adjustment of cellulose ester dope for skin A layer)
Cellulose ester resin: those listed in Table 3 100 parts by mass Additive A: those listed in Table 5 Amounts listed in Table 5 (unit: parts by mass)
Matting agent: silica particles having an average particle diameter of 16 nm (aerosil R972)
Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.) 0.05 parts by weight Dichloromethane 406 parts by weight Methanol 61 parts by weight When dope is cast, as shown in FIG. The dope was cast together. Here, the core layer is made thickest by adjusting the casting amount of each dope, and as a result, simultaneous multilayer casting is performed so that the film thickness of the stretched film becomes the value shown in Table 4 below. Formed.
 次に、この流延膜を流延バンドから剥ぎ取り、テンターを用いて延伸率30%まで拡幅した後、140℃で60秒間緩和させた。その後、フィルムを乾燥室に送り、ローラに巻き掛けながら搬送する間に乾燥を十分に行った。 Next, this cast film was peeled off from the cast band, widened to a stretch rate of 30% using a tenter, and then relaxed at 140 ° C. for 60 seconds. Thereafter, the film was sent to a drying chamber and sufficiently dried while being conveyed while being wound around a roller.
 以上のようにして、乾燥膜厚45μmの積層セルロースエステルフィルム3を得た。 Thus, a laminated cellulose ester film 3 having a dry film thickness of 45 μm was obtained.
 [実施例4~10、15、16、20、比較例17~19]
 上記表3及び下記表4~6に記載のように、セルロースエステル、添加剤、膜厚、濾過助剤、フィルタなどを変更した以外は実施例3と同様にして、各実施例及び比較例のフィルムを得た。
[Examples 4 to 10, 15, 16, 20 and Comparative Examples 17 to 19]
As described in Table 3 and Tables 4 to 6 below, in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the cellulose ester, additive, film thickness, filter aid, filter, etc. were changed, A film was obtained.
 なお、表5に記載した添加剤Aの内容は下記の通りである。
添加剤A:〔化3〕 I-(2)
In addition, the content of the additive A described in Table 5 is as follows.
Additive A: [Chemical Formula 3] I- (2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
 (評価)
 (フィルムの異物数)
 フィルムの両側に透過光を遮断するように二枚の偏光板を配置した後、片側から光を照射し、反対側から光学顕微鏡によって150倍で観察し、100mm内の円換算直径60~100μm、10~50μmの範囲内の輝点異物の数を数え、これをフィルムの異物数とした。
(Evaluation)
(Number of foreign objects on the film)
After arranging two polarizing plates on both sides of the film to block the transmitted light, irradiate light from one side, and observe from the opposite side with an optical microscope at a magnification of 150 times, and the diameter in terms of circle within 100 mm 2 is 60-100 μm The number of bright spot foreign matter within the range of 10 to 50 μm was counted, and this was taken as the number of foreign matters on the film.
 (ヘイズの測定)
 濁度計(NDH2000,日本電色工業(株))を用いて、23℃、55%RHの環境下24時間放置したフィルムにおいて、同環境下、フィルムのヘイズ測定を行った。
(Measure haze)
Using a turbidimeter (NDH2000, Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd.), haze measurement of the film was performed in the same environment for 23 hours at 23 ° C. and 55% RH.
 まず、フィルム以外の測定器具のブランクヘイズ1を測定する。
1.きれいにしたスライドガラスの上にグリセリンを一滴(0.05ml)たらす。このとき液滴に気泡が入らないように注意する。ガラスは見た目がきれいでも汚れていることがあるので必ず洗剤で洗浄したものを使用する。
2.その上にカバーガラスを載せる。カバーガラスは押さえなくてもグリセリンは広がる。
3.ヘイズメーターにセットしブランクヘイズ1を測定する。ついで、試料を含めたヘイズ2を測定する。
4.スライドガラス上にグリセリン(0.05ml)を滴下する。
5.その上に測定する試料フィルムを載せる。
6.試料フィルム上にグリセリン(0.05ml)を滴下する。
7.その上にカバーガラスを載せる。
8.ヘイズメーターにセットしヘイズ2を測定する。
9.(ヘイズ2)-(ヘイズ1)=(本発明に係る内部ヘイズ)を算出する。
First, the blank haze 1 of a measuring instrument other than a film is measured.
1. Drip a drop (0.05 ml) of glycerin on a cleaned glass slide. At this time, care is taken so that bubbles do not enter the droplet. Be sure to use glass that has been cleaned with a detergent because it may look dirty even if it looks clean.
2. Place the cover glass on top of it. Glycerin spreads without pressing the cover glass.
3. Set on a haze meter and measure blank haze 1. Next, the haze 2 including the sample is measured.
4). Glycerin (0.05 ml) is dropped on a slide glass.
5. A sample film to be measured is placed thereon.
6). Glycerin (0.05 ml) is dropped on the sample film.
7. Place the cover glass on top of it.
8). Set in a haze meter and measure haze 2.
9. (Haze 2) − (Haze 1) = (Internal haze according to the present invention) is calculated.
 上記測定にて使用したガラス、グリセリンを以下の通りである。
ガラス:MICRO SLIDE GLASS S9213 MATSUNAMI
グリセリン:関東化学製 鹿特級
 上記測定結果等を表6に示す。
The glass and glycerin used in the above measurement are as follows.
Glass: MICRO SLIDE GLASS S9213 MATUNAMI
Glycerin: Deer special grade manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd. The above measurement results are shown in Table 6.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
 表6に示した結果から明らかなように、本発明に係るセルロースエステルフィルムは、高い透明度を示すことが分かる。 As is clear from the results shown in Table 6, it can be seen that the cellulose ester film according to the present invention exhibits high transparency.
 <偏光板の作製>
 各実施例及び比較例で得られたセルロースエステルフィルム1~20を用い、下記方法により偏光板を作製した。
<Preparation of polarizing plate>
Using the cellulose ester films 1 to 20 obtained in the respective examples and comparative examples, polarizing plates were produced by the following method.
 厚さ120μmのポリビニルアルコールフィルムを、一軸延伸(温度110℃、延伸倍率5倍)した。これをヨウ素0.075g、ヨウ化カリウム5g、水100gからなる水溶液に60秒間浸漬し、次いでヨウ化カリウム6g、ホウ酸7.5g、水100gからなる68℃の水溶液に浸漬した。これを水洗、乾燥し偏光子を得た。 A 120 μm thick polyvinyl alcohol film was uniaxially stretched (temperature: 110 ° C., stretch ratio: 5 times). This was immersed in an aqueous solution composed of 0.075 g of iodine, 5 g of potassium iodide and 100 g of water for 60 seconds, and then immersed in an aqueous solution of 68 ° C. composed of 6 g of potassium iodide, 7.5 g of boric acid and 100 g of water. This was washed with water and dried to obtain a polarizer.
 次いで、下記工程1~5に従って偏光子と前記セルロースエステルフィルム1~20と、裏面側には市販のセルロースエステルフィルム(KC4UY、コニカミノルタオプト(株)製)を偏光板保護フィルムとして貼り合わせて偏光板を作製した。 Next, according to the following steps 1 to 5, a polarizer, the cellulose ester films 1 to 20, and a commercially available cellulose ester film (KC4UY, manufactured by Konica Minolta Opto Co., Ltd.) are bonded as a polarizing plate protective film on the back side. A plate was made.
 工程1:セルロースエステルフィルム1~20を50℃の2モル/lの水酸化カリウム溶液に30秒間浸漬し、次いで水洗し乾燥して表面を鹸化したセルロースエステルフィルムを得た。 Step 1: Cellulose ester films 1 to 20 were immersed in a 2 mol / l potassium hydroxide solution at 50 ° C. for 30 seconds, then washed with water and dried to obtain a cellulose ester film having a saponified surface.
 工程2:前記偏光子を固形分2質量%のポリビニルアルコール接着剤槽中に1~2秒浸漬した。 Step 2: The polarizer was immersed in a polyvinyl alcohol adhesive tank having a solid content of 2% by mass for 1 to 2 seconds.
 工程3:工程2で偏光子に付着した過剰の接着剤を軽く拭き除き、これを工程1で処理したセルロースエステルフィルムの上にのせ、更に裏面側セルロースエステルフィルムをのせて配置した。 Step 3: Excess adhesive adhered to the polarizer in Step 2 was lightly wiped off, and this was placed on the cellulose ester film treated in Step 1, and further placed on the back side cellulose ester film.
 工程4:工程3で積層したセルロースエステルフィルム1~20と偏光子と裏面側セルロースエステルフィルムを圧力20~30N/cm、搬送スピードは約2m/分で貼合した。 Step 4: The cellulose ester films 1 to 20, the polarizer and the back side cellulose ester film laminated in Step 3 were bonded at a pressure of 20 to 30 N / cm 2 and a conveying speed of about 2 m / min.
 工程5:80℃の乾燥機中に工程4で作製した偏光子とセルロースエステルフィルム1~20と裏面側セルロースエステルフィルムとを貼り合わせた試料を2分間乾燥し、偏光板を作製した。 Step 5: A sample obtained by bonding the polarizer prepared in Step 4 with the cellulose ester films 1 to 20 and the back side cellulose ester film in a drier at 80 ° C. was dried for 2 minutes to prepare a polarizing plate.
 <液晶表示装置の作製>
 視野角測定を行う液晶パネルを以下のようにして作製し、液晶表示装置としての特性を評価した。
<Production of liquid crystal display device>
A liquid crystal panel for viewing angle measurement was produced as follows, and the characteristics as a liquid crystal display device were evaluated.
 VAモード型液晶表示装置(SONY製BRAVIAV1、40インチ型)の予め貼合されていた両面の偏光板を剥がして、上記作製した偏光板をセルロースエステルフィルム1~20側が、液晶セルのガラス面になるように両面に貼合した。 Remove the polarizing plates on both sides of the VA mode type liquid crystal display device (Sony BRAVIAV1, 40-inch type) previously bonded, and place the prepared polarizing plate on the glass surface of the liquid crystal cell on the cellulose ester film 1-20 side. It was pasted on both sides.
 その際、予め貼合されていた偏光板と同一の方向に吸収軸が向くように行い、液晶表示装置101~120を各々作製した。 At that time, the liquid crystal display devices 101 to 120 were manufactured by performing the absorption axis in the same direction as the polarizing plate bonded in advance.
 この液晶表示装置についてコントラストについて評価し、結果を表7に示した。 The liquid crystal display device was evaluated for contrast, and the results are shown in Table 7.
 《液晶表示装置の評価》
 〔正面コントラスト〕
 液晶表示装置のコントラスト特性の評価をELDIM社製EZ-contrast160Dを用い、液晶表示装置で白表示と黒表示の表示画面の法線方向からの輝度を測定し、その比を正面コントラストとした。
<Evaluation of liquid crystal display device>
[Front contrast]
The contrast characteristic of the liquid crystal display device was evaluated by using EZ-contrast 160D manufactured by ELDIM, the luminance from the normal direction of the display screen of white display and black display was measured with the liquid crystal display device, and the ratio was defined as the front contrast.
 正面コントラスト=(表示装置の法線方向から測定した白表示の輝度)/(表示装置の法線方向から測定した黒表示の輝度)
 以下のように、コントラストの評価ランクを決定した。
◎:1100~1200以上
○:1000~1100未満
×:1000未満
 ○以上であれば、実用上、問題ない。
Front contrast = (brightness of white display measured from normal direction of display device) / (brightness of black display measured from normal direction of display device)
The evaluation rank of contrast was determined as follows.
A: 1100 to 1200 or more ○: 1000 to less than 1100 ×: less than 1000 ○ If it is greater than or equal to ○, there is no practical problem.
 上記評価結果を表7に示す。 The evaluation results are shown in Table 7.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
 表7に示した結果から、本発明のセルロースエステルフィルムを用いた液晶表示装置はコントラストが高いことが分かる。 From the results shown in Table 7, it can be seen that the liquid crystal display device using the cellulose ester film of the present invention has high contrast.
 10 共流延ダイ
 11 口金部分
 13、15 表層用スリット
 14 基層用スリット
 16 金属支持体
 17、19 表層用ドープ
 18 基層用ドープ
 20 多層構造ウェブ
 21 スキンB層
 22 コア層
 23 スキンA層
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Co-casting die 11 Base part 13, 15 Surface layer slit 14 Base layer slit 16 Metal support 17, 19 Surface layer dope 18 Base layer dope 20 Multi-layer structure web 21 Skin B layer 22 Core layer 23 Skin A layer

Claims (8)

  1.  炭素数が2~4の範囲内であるアシル基を有し、かつアシル基置換度が2.0~2.5の範囲内であるセルロースエステルを含有するセルロースエステルフィルムであって、円換算直径が60~100μmの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下であり、円換算直径が10~50μmの範囲内である異物が10cm四方あたり10個以下であり、内部ヘイズが0.1以下であり、かつ厚さが20~50μmの範囲内であることを特徴とするセルロースエステルフィルム。 A cellulose ester film containing a cellulose ester having an acyl group having a carbon number in the range of 2 to 4 and an acyl group substitution degree in the range of 2.0 to 2.5, and having a diameter in terms of a circle Is 10 or less per 10 cm square, and 10 or less foreign matter is 10 to 50 μm in diameter, and the internal haze is 0.1 or less. And a cellulose ester film having a thickness in the range of 20 to 50 μm.
  2.  下記式(1)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するコア層と下記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含むスキンB層とが積層製膜されたセルロースエステルフィルムであることを特徴とする請求項1に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。
    式(1):2.0<Z<2.5
    (式(1)中、Zはコア層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
    式(2):2.7<Z<3.0
    (式(2)中、Zはスキン層のセルロースエステルの総アシル基置換度を表す。)
    2. A cellulose ester film in which a core layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (1) and a skin B layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (2) are laminated and formed: The cellulose ester film as described.
    Formula (1): 2.0 <Z 1 <2.5
    (In the formula (1), Z 1 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the core layer.)
    Formula (2): 2.7 <Z 2 <3.0
    (In the formula (2), Z 2 represents a total acyl group substitution degree of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.)
  3.  前記積層製膜されたコア層のスキンB層がある面とは反対側の面上に、下記式(2)を満たすセルロースエステルを含有するスキンA層を有することを特徴とする請求項1又は請求項2に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。
    式(2):2.7<Z<3.0
    (式(2)中、Zはスキン層のセルロースエステルの総アシル置換度を表す。)
    The skin A layer containing a cellulose ester satisfying the following formula (2) is provided on the surface opposite to the surface on which the skin B layer of the core layer formed by lamination is present. The cellulose ester film according to claim 2.
    Formula (2): 2.7 <Z 2 <3.0
    (In the formula (2), Z 2 represents a total degree of acyl substitution of the cellulose ester of the skin layer.)
  4.  フィルムの長さが、5000~10000mの範囲内であり、当該フィルムの幅が1.9~2.5mの範囲内であることを特徴とする請求項1から請求項3までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。 The length of the film is in the range of 5000 to 10000 m, and the width of the film is in the range of 1.9 to 2.5 m. The cellulose ester film described in 1.
  5.  平均粒径が5~20μmの範囲内であり、粒径標準偏差が平均粒径の0.5倍以下の濾過助剤と濾過精度が1~5μmの範囲内であるフィルタを用いて濾過する工程を経て製造されたことを特徴とする請求項1から請求項4までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルム。 Filtering using a filter aid having an average particle size in the range of 5 to 20 μm, a particle size standard deviation of 0.5 times or less of the average particle size, and a filter having a filtration accuracy in the range of 1 to 5 μm The cellulose ester film according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the cellulose ester film is produced through a process.
  6.  請求項1から請求項5までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルムを製造するセルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法であって、平均粒径が5~20μmの範囲内であり、粒径標準偏差が平均粒径の0.5倍以下の濾過助剤と、濾過精度が1~5μmの範囲内であるフィルタを用いて濾過する工程を有することを特徴とするセルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法。 A method for producing a cellulose ester film for producing a cellulose ester film according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the average particle size is in the range of 5 to 20 µm, and the particle size standard deviation is A method for producing a cellulose ester film, comprising a step of filtering using a filter aid having a mean particle size of 0.5 times or less and a filter having a filtration accuracy within a range of 1 to 5 μm.
  7.  請求項1から請求項5までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルムが具備されたことを特徴とする偏光板。 A polarizing plate comprising the cellulose ester film according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  8.  請求項1から請求項5までのいずれか一項に記載のセルロースエステルフィルムが具備されたことを特徴とする液晶表示装置。 A liquid crystal display device comprising the cellulose ester film according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
PCT/JP2011/064004 2010-09-15 2011-06-20 Cellulose ester film, production method therefor, polarizing plate provided therewith, and liquid crystal display WO2012035838A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012533892A JPWO2012035838A1 (en) 2010-09-15 2011-06-20 Cellulose ester film, method for producing the same, polarizing plate provided with the same, and liquid crystal display device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010206444 2010-09-15
JP2010-206444 2010-09-15
JP2010264705 2010-11-29
JP2010-264705 2010-11-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012035838A1 true WO2012035838A1 (en) 2012-03-22

Family

ID=45831320

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/064004 WO2012035838A1 (en) 2010-09-15 2011-06-20 Cellulose ester film, production method therefor, polarizing plate provided therewith, and liquid crystal display

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2012035838A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2012035838A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013227531A (en) * 2012-03-26 2013-11-07 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Mixture and method of manufacturing the same
JP2014133872A (en) * 2012-12-14 2014-07-24 Fujifilm Corp Cellulose acylate film and method for manufacturing the same, and optical film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same
WO2015037723A1 (en) * 2013-09-13 2015-03-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Polymer film, polymer film production method, polarization plate and liquid crystal display device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007276280A (en) * 2006-04-07 2007-10-25 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Cellulose ester film, method for producing cellulose ester film, optical film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display
JP2009286931A (en) * 2008-05-30 2009-12-10 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Cellulose ester film
JP2010058331A (en) * 2008-09-02 2010-03-18 Fujifilm Corp Cellulose acylate laminate film, its production method and polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008031396A (en) * 2006-06-28 2008-02-14 Fujifilm Corp Method for manufacturing cellulose acylate composition, and cellulose acylate film
JP5112652B2 (en) * 2006-06-28 2013-01-09 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for producing cellulose acylate composition and cellulose acylate film

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007276280A (en) * 2006-04-07 2007-10-25 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Cellulose ester film, method for producing cellulose ester film, optical film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display
JP2009286931A (en) * 2008-05-30 2009-12-10 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Cellulose ester film
JP2010058331A (en) * 2008-09-02 2010-03-18 Fujifilm Corp Cellulose acylate laminate film, its production method and polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013227531A (en) * 2012-03-26 2013-11-07 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Mixture and method of manufacturing the same
JP2014133872A (en) * 2012-12-14 2014-07-24 Fujifilm Corp Cellulose acylate film and method for manufacturing the same, and optical film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same
WO2015037723A1 (en) * 2013-09-13 2015-03-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Polymer film, polymer film production method, polarization plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2015077794A (en) * 2013-09-13 2015-04-23 富士フイルム株式会社 Polymer film, manufacturing method of polymer film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2012035838A1 (en) 2014-02-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5222064B2 (en) Cellulose acylate laminated film, production method thereof, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP5507819B2 (en) Cellulose ester film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2011118339A (en) Cellulose acylate laminate film, method for producing the same, polarizer, and liquid crystal display device
JP2013254190A (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
JP5636388B2 (en) Cellulose acylate film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display using the same
JP2010046834A (en) Laminated cellulose acylate film and polarizing plate
JP2010215878A (en) Cellulose acylate film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display apparatus
JP5324814B2 (en) Cellulose acylate film and polarizing plate
JP2009298884A (en) Optical film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display apparatus
JP5648680B2 (en) Cellulose ester film, method for producing the same, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device provided with the same
JP5869820B2 (en) Cellulose acylate laminated film and method for producing the same, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2009269970A (en) Optical film
WO2012035838A1 (en) Cellulose ester film, production method therefor, polarizing plate provided therewith, and liquid crystal display
JP5785894B2 (en) Cellulose ester film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
JP5617543B2 (en) Retardation film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2012007110A (en) Optical film and method for producing the same
JP5373336B2 (en) Cellulose ester film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
WO2011162202A1 (en) Twisted-nematic mode liquid crystal display device
WO2013047831A1 (en) Cellulose acylate film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
JP2012155287A (en) Resin film, polarizing plate protective film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
WO2012176606A1 (en) Cellulose acylate film, and polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same
JP2012224850A (en) Cellulose acylate film, polarizing plate using the same, and liquid crystal display device
JP5742930B2 (en) Cellulose ester film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device provided with the same
JP5667505B2 (en) Liquid crystal display
JP2007268898A (en) Manufacturing method for optical film, optical film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display unit

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11824850

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2012533892

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11824850

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1